DESCO Regulations

Dhaka Electric Supply Company Limited
(DESCO)
DRAFT TENDER DOCUMENT FOR

Procurement of Goods/Equipments
VOLUME - II
(Part- 2)
Tender Notice No: DESCO/CS/ PSEEIIP/Package-2/2014/---
2014
Section VI. Schedule of Supply 6-1
Section VI. Schedule of Supply
Procurement of Goods/Equipments Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

6-2 Section VI. Schedule of Supply
Lot No. : Lot-1 of Package-2

Supply of 33KV 1-Core, 500 mm2, 11KV 3-Core 300 mm2 and 3-Core 185
mm2 XLPE Underground Copper Cable with Cable Accessories

Contents
1.List of Goods and Related Services.....................................................................................6-4
2.Delivery and Completion Schedule .....................................................................................6-5
3.Technical Specifications ......................................................................................................6-7

4.Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule....6-26
5.Drawings....................................................................6-38

1. List of Goods and Related Services
Lot-1 of Package-2
Lot Name: Supply and Delivery of 33KV 1-Core, 500 mm2, 11KV 3-Core 300 mm2
and 3-Core 185 mm2 XLPE Underground Copper Cable with Cable Accessories
Item Name of Goods or Description Unit of Quantity
No. Related Services Measurement
01 Supply & Delivery of: 33KV 1-Core, XLPE, 500 sq. mm U/G 210,000 Metres
Copper Cables
02 Supply & Delivery of: Straight Through Joints for 33KV, 500 Nos.
XLPE, 500 sq.mm U/G Copper Cables
03 Termination Kits for 33KV,1-Core,
XLPE, 500 sq. mm U/G Copper
Cables
3.1 Supply & Delivery of: Indoor 170 Sets
3.2 Supply & Delivery of: Outdoor 170 Sets
04 Supply & Delivery of: 11KV XLPE, 3-Core, 300 sq. mm U/G 200,000 Metres.
Copper Cables
05 Supply & Delivery of: Straight Through Jointing Box For 450 Nos.
11KV, XLPE, 3-Core, 300 sq.mm U/G
Copper Cables
06 Termination Kits for 11KV, XLPE, 3-
Core, 300 sq. mm U/G Copper Cables
6.1 Supply & Delivery of: Indoor 200 Sets.
6.2 Supply & Delivery of: Out door 150 Sets.
07 Supply & Delivery of: 11KV, XLPE, 3-Core, 185 sq.mm U/G 100,000 Metres.
Copper Cables
08 Supply & Delivery of: Straight Through Jointing Box For 250 Sets.
11KV, XLPE, 3-Core, 185 sq.mm U/G
Copper Cables
09 Termination Kits for 3-Core, XLPE,
185 sq. mm U/G Copper Cables
9.1 Supply & Delivery of: Indoor 100 Sets.
9.2 Supply & Delivery of: Outdoor 100 Sets.
Note: (1) Each set of Termination Kit shall comprise 3 (three) nos. of kits.
(2) Each set of Outdoor Termination Kit shall also comprise 3 nos. of 33KV Spacer
Insulator for 3 (three) phases and a galvanized mounting clamp.

2. Delivery and Completion Schedule
The delivery period shall start as of 21 days after the issuance of commitment letter (CL) on Letter of
Credit from Asian Development Bank (ADB).
The delivery shall be completed within 270 (two hundred and seventy) days counting from 21 days
after issuance of CL in the DESCOs store at Mirpur, Dhaka, Bangladesh.
If the bidders guaranteed delivery time is longer than the delivery period specified in this Schedule,
the bid shall be evaluated in the manner and to extent specified in Section-III, Evaluation and
Qualification criteria.
Item Required
No. Qty. Location Arrival Date
of Goods or
Description of Goods or Delivery
Completion
Related Service Period
Date for
Related
Services
Port of Entry
for Goods
offered from
270 days
outside the
counting
Purchasers
from 21
Country and
days after
Ex-Works for
issuance of
Goods offered
CL.
from within the
Purchasers
country.
01 33KV, XLPE, 1Cx500 sq. 210,000
mm U/G Copper Cables Metres.
02 Straight Through Jointing
Box for 33KV, XLPE, 500
1Cx500 sq.mm U/G Copper Nos.
Cable
03 Termination Kits for 33KV,
XLPE, 1Cx500 sq. mm
U/G Copper Cables
3.1 Indoor 170
Sets.
3.2 Outdoor 170
Sets.
04 11KV XLPE, 3-Core, 300 200,000
sq. mm U/G Copper Cables Meters
Box For 11KV, XLPE, 3- 450
Core, 300 sq.mm U/G Sets.
Copper Cables
06 Termination Kits for 11KV,
XLPE, 3-Core, 300 sq. mm
U/G Copper Cables

Item Required
No. Qty. Location Arrival Date
of Goods or
Completion
Date for
Related
Services
Port of Entry
for Goods
offered from
270 days
outside the
counting
Purchasers
from 21
Country and
days after
Ex-Works for
issuance of
Goods offered
CL.
from within the
Purchasers
country.
6.1 Indoor 200
Sets.
6.2 Out door 150
Sets.
07 11KV, XLPE, 3-Core, 185 100,000
sq.mm U/G Copper Cables Meters
Box For 11KV, XLPE, 3- 250
Core, 185 sq.mm U/G Sets.
Copper Cable
09 Termination Kits for 3-
Core, XLPE, 185 sq. mm
U/G Copper Cables
9.1 Indoor 100
Sets.
9.2 Outdoor 100
Sets.
Note: (1) Each set of Termination Kit shall comprise 3 (three) nos. of kits.
(3) Each set of Outdoor Termination Kit shall also comprise 3 nos. of 33KV Spacer
Insulator for 3 (three) phases and a galvanized mounting clamp.
Seal and Signature of the Bidder: ..

3. Technical Specifications
Table of Contents
Clause No. Description of Items Page No.
3.1 General 6-9
3.2 References 6-9
3.3 Climatic Condition 6-9
3.4Technical Specification of 33KV, XLPE, 1CX500 sq.mm, U/G Copper Cable
3.4.1 General Technical Requirement 6-10
3.4.2 Conductors 6-10
3.4.3 Conductor Screening 6-10
3.4.4 Insulation 6-10
3.4.5 Insulation Thickness 6-10
3.4.6 Insulation Screening 6-11
3.4.7 Over sheath 6-11
3.4.8 Armour 6-11
3.4.9 Manufacturers Identification 6-12
3.4.10 Continuous Current rating 6-12
3.4.11 Short Circuit rating 6-12
3.4.12 General requirement of 33KV, XLPE, 1Cx500 sq.mm, U/G 6-12
Copper Cable
3.4.13 Indoor Termination kits for 33KV XLPE, 1Cx500 sq.mm, 6-12
U/G Copper cable
3.4.14 Outdoor Termination kits for 33KV XLPE, 1Cx500 sq.mm 6-12
U/G Copper cable
3.4.15 Straight through joints for 33KV XLPE, 1Cx500 sq.mm 6-12
U/G Copper cable
3.5 Technical Specification of 11KV, XLPE, 3CX300 sq.mm, U/G Copper Cable
3.5.8 Armour 6-16
Copper Cable
3.5.13 Indoor Termination kits for 11KV XLPE, 1Cx500 sq.mm 6-17
U/G Copper cable
U/G Copper cable
U/G Copper cable
3.6 Technical Specification of 11KV, XLPE, 3CX185 sq.mm, U/G Copper Cable


3.6.8 Armour 6-19
Copper Cable
3.6.13 Indoor Termination kits for 33KV XLPE, 1Cx500 sq.mm 6-20
U/G Copper cable
U/G Copper cable
U/G Copper cable
4.0 Other Specific Requirements:
4.1 Documentation 6-22
4.2 Approval of Drawings 6-23
4.3 Packing 6-23
4.4 Inspection and Testing 6-24
4.5 Costs related to inspection and testing 6-25
4.6 Post landing Inspection 6-25
5.0 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for
5.1 33KV, XLPE, 1Cx500 sq.mm, U/G Copper Cable 6-26
5.2 Jointing Kits of 33KV, XLPE, 1Cx500 sq.mm, U/G Copper 6-28
Cable
5.4 Jointing Kits 11KV, XLPE, 3Cx300 sq.mm, U/G Copper 6-32
Cable
5.6 Jointing Kits 11KV, XLPE, 3Cx185 sq.mm, U/G Copper 6-36
Cable

3.1 General
Where a Manufacturers Standard or a national Standard equal to or better than the appropriate
specified standard has been issued and is acceptable to the Purchaser, any material or goods supplied
shall be manufactured, installed and tested in accordance with the latest revision of the relevant
standard unless otherwise specified.
Where any Standard referred to in this Specification has been superseded by a new standard prior to
the date of the letter or invitation to bid, the reference shall be deemed to be to such superseding
standard.
Deviations from this Specification or standards referred to above shall be given in the bid and shall be
accepted by the Purchaser before contract placement.
The works shall be designed to ensure continuity of service under all working condition at the site as
the first consideration and to facilitate inspection, maintenance and repairs. All electrical components
shall be adequately rated for their most onerous duty and the specified ambient temperature.
All goods supplied shall be designed and be of such quality as to require the minimum of maintenance
during service. No welding, plugging or filling of defective parts shall be carried out without the prior
sanction in writing of the Purchaser. Corresponding parts of similar goods/material, and
goods/material liable to renewal, shall be fully interchangeable
3.2 References
The recommendations and tests specified in the standards shall be adhered to. Equivalent standards
established or approved in the country of manufacture may be used subject to the Purchasers
approval.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to demonstrate to the Purchaser that any proposed
National Standard is equal to or superior to the equivalent IEC or BS. All costs for this demonstration
are deemed included in the Contractors Bid Prices.
3.3 Climatic Condition
The offered goods shall be suitable for working in the climate conditions of Bangladesh as described
below:
Altitude : 0-300 meters above the sea level

Maximum ambient temperature : 45C
Minimum ambient temperature : 5C
Humidity : 98%
Mean annual rainfall : 1500-3000 mm
No. of annual rainy days : 80-120 days
Average isokeraunic level : 80 days/year
Pollution of ambient air : dust, salt, chemical.

3.4. Technical Specification of 33KV, 1CX500 sq.mm, XLPE, U/G

Copper Cable and Cable Accessories
3.4.1 General Technical requirement
Cross Link Polyethylene Cable (XLPE) cables shall be suitable for operation at voltage of
33KV between phases at continuous maximum conductor temperatures of 90 deg. C. the
cable shall be suitable in all respect for use on an 33KV system with a nominal three phase
fault level of 31.5KA. The cables and associated fittings, joints and termination shall be so
designed to prevent damage to the cable or fittings, except in the immediate vicinity of the
fault, in the event of an installation failure at any point which results in a fault current to earth
of 25KV for 1 sec.
Single core, Copper Conductor, XLPE Insulated Copper screened 500 mm2 under Power
Cable shall comply with IEC 60502-2, except as modified or extended by the requirement of
the specification. The length of cable on a drum shall be 500M and it shall be shipped on
standard non-returnable steel drum, each drum having stencilled on its side; size, type and
length of cable, together with its gross weight, net weight and contract number.
3.4.2 Conductors
All conductors shall be stranded, circular and compacted and comply with IEC 60228. Copper
conductor cables shall be constructed with core of size 1CX500 mm2.
3.4.3 Conductor Screening
The conductor shall be screened with an extruded layer of semi-conducting compound,

compatible in all respects with the conductor and insulation materials.
Conductor screen shall be bounded to the insulation such that no voids or discontinuities are
present. The bound shall be adequate to withstand the normal electrical and mechanical
stresses in service without degradation or separation.
Lapped semi-conducting tape not to be used for conductor screens.
3.4.4 Insulation
The insulation shall consist of cross-linked polyethylene tightly extruded over the conductor
screen. The insulation shall generally comply with IEC 60502-2, except that insulation
resistance measurements shall be made on the screened core without immersion in water.
The highest possible purity of insulation material is required. The bidder shall demonstrate
that adequate precautions are taken to remove contaminants and to eliminate the introduction
of particles of contaminants during material handling or extrusion process.
The Cable shall be manufactured through VCV.
The insulation material shall be cross-linked by a dry process. A cross-linking process using
steam curing will not be permitted.
3.4.5 Insulation Thickness
The thickness of insulation shall be determined by taking the average of number of

measurements and shall be not less than the values tabulated in IEC Publication 60502-2.

Insulation thickness shall not depart from the specified nominal value by an amount
exceeding the tolerances specified in IEC Publication 60502-2.
The thickness at any point, however, is less than the specified value, provided the difference
does not exceed 10 percent plus 0.1mm.
The thickness of the semi conducting screens on the conductors and over the insulation shall
not be included in the measurement of insulation thickness.
3.4.6 Insulation Screening
The insulation screen shall comprise a non-metallic semi-conducting polyethylene part

combination with a metallic part.
The non-metallic semi-conducting part shall be applied directly upon insulation of each core
and shall be comprise a layer of extruded semi-conducting polyethylene compound.
The conductor screen, Insulation and semi-conducting part of insulation screen layer shall be
applied to the conductor in common extrusion process with dry curing system.
The metallic part shall be stranded copper applied over the layer of semi conducting
compound.
On single core cable, it shall be comprised of single layer of copper wires adequately spaced a
part.
The non-metallic part shall be applied directly upon the insulation and shall be a layer of
extruded semi-conducting compound. This screen shall be formed in such a way that it is
readily removed for jointing.
The insulation screen shall be capable of carrying an earth fault current of 25KA for 1 sec.
without damage.
3.4.7 Over sheath
The cable shall be sheathed overall with a MDPE outer sheath. The outer sheath shall be of
smooth and uniform composition and free of holes, crakes, and bisectors and in perfection.
As a protection against termite attack, the outer covering shall contain the termite repellent
substance of Pb napthanate.
The outer sheath shall be adequate strength and thickness to withstand the test voltage and
mechanical tests, and shall be suitable for ambient conditions at site.
The outer sheath material shall be capable of withstanding without damage or deformation the
highest temperature achieved with the cable at its rated current and the site ambient
conditions.
The outer surface of the polyethylene outer sheath shall be specified in IEC 60502-2.
3.4.8 Armour
The armour shall consist of a single layer of non-magnetic wires in accordance with IEC
60502-2.

The non-magnetic joints are brazed or welded and any wire shall be not less than 1mm from
the nearest joints in any other armour wire in the complete cable.
3.4.9 Manufacturer Identification
The manufacturer identification shall be printed with black colour on the identifying tape. It shall
show the rated voltage, conductor size, the year in which the cable was manufactured, and name of
manufacturer at an interval of not more than 1000 mm throughout the length of the cable.
The designated voltage and cable marking shall also be embossed on the outer polyethylene covering.
The gap between the end of one set of embossed characters and the beginning of the next shall be not
greater than 150 mm throughout the length of the cable with character approximately 10 mm high.
Name of the purchaser Dhaka Electric Supply Company Limited (DESCO) shall be embossed at
ever 1000 mm gap.
3.4.10 Continuous Current Rating
The continuous current rating of the cable shall be calculated in accordance with the procedure
described in IEC 287 based on the site ambient condition including solar radiation, with the insulation
parameters as specified.
The bidder shall base his ratings on the site ambient conditions, with the methods of installation and
bonding as specified, due account shall be taken of the heating due to other cables or other sources of
heat where these can be identified.
The maximum conductor temperature shall not exceed 90 deg. C when carrying the rated current
under the most onerous site conditions.
3.4.11 Short Circuit Rating
The cable shall be capable of withstanding without damage or permanent distortion the specified
maximum short circuit current for the specified times.
The temperature of the conductors during the passes of the specified maximum fault current for the
specified time shall not exceed 250 deg. C.
The cable design, including the design of external clamps or other restraining devices shall be
adequate to contain the mechanical forces arising from two or three phase short circuit currents and
longitudinal forces whether arising from magnetic effects or from thermal expansion of conductors.
3.4.12 General Requirement of 33KV XLPE, 1-Core, 500 mm2 U/G Copper cable
Item Description of Items Unit Particulars

No.
1 Nominal System Voltage KV 33
2 Rated Voltage (IEC 183) KV 18/30
3 Cross sectional Area of mm2 500
Conductors
4 Insulation thickness mm Average thickness shall not be less than 8.0 nominal
value as per IEC 502. However, thickness at any

point may be less than nominal value provided that

the difference does not exceed 0.1mm + 10% of
nominal value.
5 Manufacturing process Manufactured through VCV.
6 Conductor Material Copper
7 Shape of Conductor Compact Circular
8 Type of Conductor Screen Semi-conducting XLPE
9 Conductor Temperature at C 250
end of short Circuit
3.4.13 Indoor Termination Kits for 33KV XLPE, 1-Core, 500 mm2 U/G Copper cable
Item Description of Particulars

No. Items
I Application For 33KV, XLPE, 1Cx500 mm2 Copper Conductors
Ii Insulation For Indoor switchgear terminations
Iii System 33KV, effectively earthed system
Iv Cable conductor 500 mm2 Copper Conductors
V Kit content - Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating and non-tracking tubing
- Heat shrinkable stress control tubing
- Stress relieving mastic strip
- Truck resistant sealant tape
- Cable preparation kit
- Solder less earth connection kit
- Compression lugs for 500 mm2 Copper Conductors
- Misc. other material
- Installation instructions
3.4.14 Outdoor Termination Kits for 33KV XLPE, 1-Core, 500 mm2 U/G Copper cable

No. Items
Ii Insulation For Outdoor installation on poles/structures
V Kit content - Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating and non-tracking tubing
- Heat shrinkable truck resistant rain skirt
- Support insulator
- Support insulators Tee Brackets
3.4.15 Straight-through joint box for 33KV XLPE, 1-Core, 500 mm2 U/G Copper cable

No. Items

Ii Insulation For underground horizontal mounting

V Construction The joint shall be proof against ingress of moisture and water
Vi Kit content - Compression ferrules
- Valid filling tape
- Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating tape
- Heat shrinkable black/red dual wall
- Estomeric tube
- Roll spring
- Heat shrinkable outer jacket tube
Technical Specification of 11KV, XLPE, 3CX300 sq.mm, U/G

Copper Cable and Jointing Accessories
3.5.1 General Technical Requirements:
Cross Link Polyethylene U/G Cable (XLPE) cables shall be suitable for operation at voltage
of 11KV between phases at continuous maximum conductor temperatures of 90C. the cable
shall be suitable in all respect for use on an 11KV system with a nominal three phase fault
level of 25KA. The cables and associated fittings, joints and termination shall be so designed
to prevent damage to the cable or fittings, except in the immediate vicinity of the fault, in the
event of an installation failure at any point which results in a fault current to earth of 10KA
for 1 sec.
The length of cable on a drum shall be 500M and it shall be shipped on standard non-
returnable steel drum, each drum having stencilled on its side; size, type and length of cable,
together with its gross weight, net weight and contract number.
3.5.2 Conductors
Copper conductors shall be stranded, circular and compacted and comply with IEC 60228.
Cables shall be constructed with three cores of sizes 300 mm2 conductor.
The conductor shall be screened with an extruded layer of semi-conducting material of 0.5mm
thickness for both the cables.

3.5.4 Insulation
screen. The insulation shall generally comply with IEC 502, except that insulation resistance
measurements shall be made on the screened core without immersion in water.
The Cable shall be manufactured through VCV/CCV.

measurements and shall be not less than the values tabulated in IEC 60502.
exceeding the tolerances specified in IEC 60502-2.
The thickness at any point, if less than the specified value, provided the difference does not
exceed 10 percent plus 0.1mm, may be acceptable.
The cable shall have a screen over the insulation of each core, which shall consist of a non-
metallic semi-conducting part in combination with a metallic part.
compound.
without damage.
3.5.7 Over sheath
The over sheath shall be an extruded layer of red PVC suitable for UV stabilized complying
with the requirements of IEC 60502-2.
The external surface of the over sheath shall be embossed at every 1000 mm gap along two or
more lines approximately equally spaced around the circumferences ELECTRIC CABLE
11000V, and the letters Dhaka Electric Supply Company Limited (DESCO). The letters
and figures shall be raised and shall consist of upright block characters. The maximum size of
the characters shall be 13mm and the minimum size 15% of the approximate overall diameter

of the cable. The gap between the end of one set of embossed characters and the beginning of
next shall not be greater than 300mm.
The manufacturers name shall be provided throughout the length of the cable.
3.5.8 Armour
The armour shall consist of a single layer of galvanized steel wires in accordance with IEC
60502.
The galvanized steel wire shall comply with BS 1442. When joints in the wire are necessary
they shall be brazed or welded and any wire shall be not less than 1 mm from the nearest
joints in any other armour wire in the complete cable.
The manufacturer identification shall be printed with black colour on the identifying tape. It
shall show the rated voltage, conductor size, the year in which the cable was manufactured,
and name of manufacturer at an interval of not more than 1000 mm throughout the length of
the cable.
The designated voltage and cable marking shall also be embossed on the outer PVC covering.
The continuous current rating of the cable shall be calculated in accordance with the
procedure described in IEC 287 based on the site ambient condition including solar radiation,
with the insulation parameters as specified.
The maximum conductor temperature shall not exceed 90C when carrying the rated current
The cable shall be capable of withstanding without damage or permanent distortion the
specified maximum short circuit current for the specified times.
The temperature of the conductors during the passes of the specified maximum fault current
for the specified time shall not exceed 250C.
3.5.12 General Requirement of 11KV XLPE, 3-Core, 300 mm2 U/G Copper cable

No.
Conductors
4 Insulation thickness mm Average thickness shall not be less than 8.0
nominal value as per IEC 502. However,
thickness at any point may be less than
nominal value provided that the difference
does not exceed 0.1mm + 10% of nominal

value.
5 Manufacturing process Manufactured through VCV.
i Application For 11KV, 3-core, XLPE 300 mm2 Copper Conductors

ii Installation For Indoor switchgear terminations
iii System 11KV, effectively earthed system
iv Cable conductor 300 mm2 Copper Conductors
v Kit content - Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating and non-tracking
tubing

ii Installation For outdoor installation on poles/structures
tubing
- Support insulator

ii Installation For underground horizontal mounting
v Construction The joint shall be proof against ingress of moisture and water
vi Kit content - Compression ferrules


- Estomeric tube
- Roll spring
3.6 Technical Specification of 11KV, XLPE, 3CX185 sq.mm, U/G

Copper Cable and Jointing Accessories
3.6.1 General Technical Requirement
Cross Link Polyethylene U/G Cable (XLPE) cables shall be suitable for operation at voltage
of 11KV between phases at continuous maximum conductor temperatures of 90C. the cable
shall be suitable in all respect for use on an 11KV system with a nominal three phase fault
level of 20KA. The cables and associated fittings, joints and termination shall be so designed
to prevent damage to the cable or fittings, except in the immediate vicinity of the fault, in the
event of an installation failure at any point which results in a fault current to earth of 10KA
for 1 sec.
The length of cable on a drum shall be 500M and it shall be shipped on standard non-
returnable steel drum, each drum having stencilled on its side; size, type and length of
cable, together with its gross weight, net weight and contract number.
3.6.2 Conductors
Copper conductors shall be stranded, circular and compacted and comply with IEC 60228.
Cables shall be constructed with three cores of sizes 185 mm2Copper conductor.
The conductor shall be screened with an extruded layer of semi-conducting material of 0.5mm
thickness for both the cables.
3.6.4 Insulation
screen. The insulation shall generally comply with IEC 60502, except that insulation
resistance measurements shall be made on the screened core without immersion in water.
The Cable shall be manufactured through VCV/CCV.


measurements and shall be not less than the values tabulated in IEC Publication 502.
exceeding the tolerances specified in IEC Publication 502.
The thickness at any point, if less than the specified value, provided the difference does not
exceed 10 percent plus 0.1mm, may be acceptable.
The cable shall have a screen over the insulation of each core, which shall consist of a non-
metallic semi-conducting part in combination with a metallic part.
compound.
without damage.
3.6.7 Over sheath
The over sheath shall be an extruded layer of red PVC suitable for UV stabilized complying
with the requirements of IEC 502, clause 12.
The external surface of the over sheath shall be embossed at every 1000 mm gap along two or
more lines approximately equally spaced around the circumferences ELECTRIC CABLE
11000V, and the letters Dhaka Electric Supply Company Limited (DESCO). The letters
and figures shall be raised and shall consist of upright block characters. The maximum size of
the characters shall be 13mm and the minimum size 15% of the approximate overall diameter
of the cable. The gap between the end of one set of embossed characters and the beginning of
next shall not be greater than 300mm.
The manufacturers name shall be provided throughout the length of the cable.
3.6.8 Armour
The armour shall consist of a single layer of galvanized steel wires in accordance with IEC
502.
The galvanized steel wire shall comply with BS 1442. When joints in the wire are necessary
they shall be brazed or welded and any wire shall be not less than 1 mm from the nearest
joints in any other armour wire in the complete cable.

The manufacturer identification shall be printed with black colour on the identifying tape. It
shall show the rated voltage, conductor size, the year in which the cable was manufactured,
and name of manufacturer at an interval of not more than 1000 mm throughout the length of
the cable.
The designated voltage and cable marking shall also be embossed on the outer PVC covering.
The continuous current rating of the cable shall be calculated in accordance with the
procedure described in IEC 287 based on the site ambient condition including solar radiation,
with the insulation parameters as specified.
The maximum conductor temperature shall not exceed 90C when carrying the rated current

The cable shall be capable of withstanding without damage or permanent distortion the
specified maximum short circuit current for the specified times.
The temperature of the conductors during the passes of the specified maximum fault current
for the specified time shall not exceed 250C.
3.6.12 General Technical Requirement of 11KV XLPE, 3-Core, 185 mm2 U/G Copper cable

No.
Conductors
4 Insulation thickness mm Average thickness shall not be less than 8.0
nominal value as per IEC 502. However,
thickness at any point may be less than nominal
value provided that the difference does not
exceed 0.1mm + 10% of nominal value.
5 Manufacturing process Manufactured through VCV/CCV.
ii Installation For Indoor switchgear terminations
tubing



ii Installation For outdoor installation on poles/structures
tubing
- Support insulator

ii Installation For underground horizontal mounting
v Construction The joint shall be proof against ingress of moisture and water
vi Kit content - Compression ferrules
- Estomeric tube
- Roll spring

4.0 Other Specific Requirements
4.1 Documentation:
The followings shall be submitted along with the bid.
(i) Printed Catalogues with detail technical information.

(ii) Documentary evidence on equipment & facilities so as to satisfactorily
manufacture the bid cable to maintain its acceptability with respect to the
following items:
For all extruded layers:
- Layer thickness at selected point;

- Average thickness around cable;
- Eccentricity;
- Spot minima;
- Ovality of Cable;
- Outside diameter;
- Voids in the insulation;
- Faults at the screen interfaces, e.g. protrusions
Proof of having required equipment & facility should be submitted.
(iii) Cable constructional diagram and dimensions.

(iv) Detail calculations of screen sizes to withstand the earth fault current stated in
Technical Specification.
(v) Type Test Reports on offered Cables or higher current rating of the same
voltage level in accordance with the latest version of IEC Standard and test
report earlier than 10 years as of the date of bid submission will not be
accepted. These tests shall be from an independent and well-known testing
laboratory like KEMA, CESI, CPRI, CEPRI, PEHLA or any international
accredited laboratory (The accreditation document shall be provided). The
following test certificates shall be included in the Type Test Report otherwise
bid shall be rejected:
Electrical test:
Partial Discharge Test;
Bending Test;
Tan measurement;
Heating Cycle Test;
Impulse Test;
Non-electrical Test:
Measurement of Thickness of Insulation;
Measurement of Thickness of non-metallic Sheaths;
Test for determining the mechanical properties of insulation before and
after ageing;

Test for determining the mechanical properties of non-metallic sheaths

before and after ageing;
Loss of mass test on PVC sheathe of type ST2
Pressure test at high temperature on insulations and non-metallic sheaths
Test on PVC insulation and sheaths at low temperatures
Test for resistance of PVC insulation and sheaths to cracking (heat shock
test)
Hot set test for XLPE insulations
Shrinkage test for XLPE insulation
Thermal stability test for PVC insulation
Strippability test for insulation screen
(vi) ISO Certification: ISO Certification on offered goods.

(vii) At least 01(one) piece of offered cable as sample along with the bid for visual
inspection. Samples will be returned to the unsuccessful bidders after award of
contract to the successful bidder. The samples of the successful bidder will be
returned after completion of delivery.
(viii) All data schedules duly filled up with appropriate technical data.
4.2 Approval of Drawings:
The successful bidder shall submit five (5) sets of Drawings and other technical information
of the offered goods to the office of the SE (P&D), DESCO within thirty (30) days from the
date of signing of the contract agreement, for approval.
No work shall be performed in connection with the fabrication and manufacture of the
offered goods until the drawings and technical data have been approved. The cost of
supplying drawing shall be borne by the supplier.
4.3 Packing:
The complete cable drum shall be covered by steel sheet to protect from external thrust and
Jointing Kits are to be export-packed and properly protected for shipment, rough
transportation and storage. Specific care shall be taken for protection in store and reference is
made to the climatic condition prevailing in Bangladesh.
Each set of jointing kits shall be sealed in waterproof polyethylene bag having a silicagel
packet placed inside the unit and then packed in polystyrene foam gasket closed by self
adhesive tape. Rating of the unit shall be marked by marker pen or label on the foam for easy
identification.
Maximum 10 (ten) sets of Jointing kits are allowed to pack into separate wooden packaging
box lined with heavy gauge polyethylene.
Between the cartoons, a suitable packing material for protection and preventing their
movement should be used. Each box shall have an individual waterproof, transparent and
heavy gauge polythene wrapper and bitumen paper and then packed into a five-ply paper
carton for Boxes. Silicagel shall be provided inside the each polythene wrapper. The packing
case should be able to withstand accidental direct exposure to weather for reasonable period.

The supplier shall be responsible for damages due to inadequate packing. A packing list
showing the contents of each packing shall be enclosed in a waterproof envelope secured to
the outside of the packing case. A copy of the packing list shall also be enclosed inside the
package.
All packages imported are liable to be opened for Customs examination and packing shall
therefore be designed to facilitate opening and re-packing thereafter.
A red band (20 cm. wide) shall be painted all around each package. Each package shall have
the following information printed on it in bold letters:
- Name of supplier.
- Port of Loading.
- Port of destination.
- Name of Consignee.
- Contract Number.
- Brief description of Stores.
- Number of Packages.
- Gross and net weight.
- Measurements.
In addition, each package shall be clearly marked or stencilled in red on two sides, the
shipping mark, DESCO, Bangladesh inscribed within a triangle mark as shown
below:
The Shipping Mark

DESCO
BANGLADESH
On the other two sides arrow marking with the wording THIS SIDE UP and
FRAGILE shall be clearly marked or stencilled to indicate the face of the package
to be kept upward.
FRAGILE
THIS SIDE UP
4.4 Inspection and Testing:
4.4.1 The Purchaser shall have the right to inspect/test the goods/materials to confirm their
conformity to the specification.
4.4.2 The purchaser shall be entitled at all reasonable time during manufacture to inspect,
examine and test of goods/materials at the manufacturers premises, workmanship
and performance.
4.4.3 The Supplier shall, after consulting the purchaser, give the Purchaser reasonable
notice in writing of the date on and the place at which any material or equipment will
be ready for testing as provided in the contract and unless the purchaser shall attend at
the place so named on date, which the supplier has stated in his notice, the supplier

may proceed with the tests, which shall be deemed to have been made in the
purchasers presence, and shall forth with forward to the purchaser duly certified
copies of test readings.
4.4.4 When the purchaser intends to attend the test he shall promptly inform the supplier
accordingly in writing, so that he can take action. The purchaser shall give the
supplier timely notice in writing of his intention to attend the test.
4.4.5 Where the supplier provides for tests on the premises of the supplier or of any
manufacturer of the supplier, except where otherwise specified, shall provide free of
charge such assistance, labour, materials, electricity, fuel, stores, apparatus and
instruments as may be requisite and as may be reasonably demanded to carry out such
test efficiently. This test shall be performed as per relevant IEC/BS Standard or
equivalent and only routine tests as agreed upon, will be performed.
4.4.6 As and when the purchaser is satisfied that any materials/equipment shall have passes
the tests referred to in this clause, purchaser shall notify the contractor in writing to
that effect.
4.4.7 Should any inspected/tested goods fail to conform to the specification, the Purchaser
shall have the right to reject any of the items or complete batch if necessary. In that
case Supplier have to replace the Equipment and to make good of them without any
financial involvement to the Purchaser. In case any of the Equipment found not
conforming to the specification at the time of post landing Inspection, the supplier
will in no way be relived from the responsibility of replacing them on making them
good at their own cost, despite the Equipment where found good at the time of Pre-
shipment Inspection.
4.4.8 Nothing in this clause shall in any way release the supplier from any warranty or
other obligations under the contract.
4.5 Costs related to inspection and testing
Where the supplier provides for tests on the premises of the supplier or of any manufacturer
of the supplier, except where otherwise specified, shall provide free of charge such assistance,
labour, materials, electricity, fuel, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be requisite and as
may be reasonably demanded to carry out such test.
All costs pertaining to Inspector's fees, travel, lodging and incidental expenses shall be borne
by the purchaser.
4.6 Post Landing Inspection (PLI):
Post landing inspection shall be done by a PLI committee of DESCO immediately after
arrival of the goods at the designated store of DESCO. The program of such inspection shall
be intimated to the representative of Supplier. The PLI committee in its report shall mention
the exact/assessed quantity of goods. The Post Landing Inspection of goods shall generally
cover the following, but not limited to it:
(i) Visual Inspection of goods;

(ii) Conformance with approved drawings with respect to dimensions/type/size.
(iii) If necessary, appropriate test on supplied goods.

5.0 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule
5.1 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 33KV, XLPE, 1Cx 500 Sq.mm U/G
Copper Cable
(to be filled up by the bidder/manufacturer with appropriate data, otherwise the bid will be treated as non-responsive)
Sl. Manufacturers
Description Unit Required Specification
No. Particulars
Name & address of the
1 To be mentioned
Manufacturer
Type/Model of the offered
2 To be mentioned
Cable
4 Rated voltage of Cable KV 18/30(36)
5 Process of manufacturing VCV
Number of core and Cross
6 sectional area of conductor Sq.mm 1X500
cores
7 Conductor materials Copper
8 Minimum no. of strand No. 53
9 Diameter of each strand mm To be mentioned
10 Shape of conductor Compacted Circular
11 Type of conductor screen Semi-conducting
Thickness of semi-
12 mm 0.6
conducting screen
Average thickness of
13 mm 8.0
insulation
14 Process of curing Dry process
Cross Linked Polyethylene
15 Material of Insulation
(XLPE)
Type of non-metallic
16 Semi-conducting
insulating screen
Thickness of semi-
17 conducting insulation mm 1.0
screen
Number and diameter of
18 No./mm Based on design calculation
copper screen strands
19 Composition of filler MDPE
20 Composition of bedding Extruded PVC
21 Thickness of bedding mm Based on design calculation
Number and diameter of
22 No./mm As per IEC 60502
armour wire
Average thickness of
23 mm Based on design calculation
MDPE over sheath
Nominal diameter of
24 mm Based on design calculation
complete cable
Nominal weight per meter
25 Kg/m Based on design calculation
of complete cable
Minimum radius of bend
26 round which cable can be mm 12xD
laid

Maximum D.C. resistance

27 of conductor per meter at Ohm/m Based on design calculation
20C
Maximum A.C. resistance
of conductor per meter at a
28 Ohm/m Based on design calculation
maximum conductor
temperature
Star reactance per meter of
29 Ohm/m Based on design calculation
cable at 50Hz
Star capacitance per meter
30 pF/m Based on design calculation
of cable at 50Hz
Charging current per
31 conductor per meter at mA Based on design calculation
18000/30000Volts, 50Hz
Minimum current carrying
32 capacity of conductor in A 775
ground at 20 C
Maximum conductor
33 temperature under C 90
continuous loading
Short circuit withstand
34. capacity of the cable for 1 KA Min 31.5
sec. Duration
Conductor temperature at
35 C 250
the end of short circuit
Earth fault withstand
36 KA Min. 25
capacity for 1 sec.
Screen short circuit
37 KA Min. 25
withstand capacity
Armour short circuit
38 KA Based on design calculation
capacity
Cable resistance,
39
reactance:
a) for positive sequence Ohm/km Based on design calculation
b) negative sequence Ohm/km Based on design calculation
c) zero sequence Ohm/km Based on design calculation
Seal and Signature of the bidder

5.2 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule of Jointing Kits for 33KV, XLPE, 1Cx
500 Sq.mm U/G Copper Cable
Item Description of Items Required Particulars Manufacturers Particulars

Sl.
No.
Indoor Termination Kits for 33KV XLPE, 1Cx500 mm2 Copper cable
i. Name and address of
the manufacturer
ii. Type/model of the kits
iii. Application For 33KV, XLPE, 1Cx500 mm2 Copper
Conductors
iv. Insulation For Indoor switchgear terminations
v. System 33KV, effectively earthed system
vi. Cable conductor 500 mm2 Copper Conductors
vii. Kit content - Heat shrinkable high voltage -
insulating and non-tracking tubing
- Heat shrinkable stress control
tubing
- Compression lugs for 500 mm2
Copper Conductors
Outdoor Termination Kits for 33KV XLPE, 1Cx500 mm2 Copper cable
the manufacturer
Conductors
iv. Insulation For Indoor installation on
poles/structures
vii. Kit content - Heat shrinkable high voltage
tubing
- Heat shrinkable truck resistant rain
skirt
- Support insulator
Copper Conductors

Straight-through joint box for 33KV XLPE, 1Cx500 mm2 Copper cable
the manufacturer
Conductors
iv. Insulation For underground horizontal mounting
vii. Construction The joint shall be proof against ingress
of moisture and water
viii. Kit content - Compression ferrules
tubing
- Heat shrinkable high voltage
insulating tape
- Estomeric tube
- Roll spring
Seal and Signature of the Bidder

5.3 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 11KV, XLPE, 3Cx300 Sq.mm U/G
Copper Cable
Item
Description of Items Unit Manufacturers
Sl. Required Particulars
Particulars
No.
1
Manufacturer
2
Cable
3 System Voltage KV 11
4 Rated Voltage of Cable KV 6/10 (12)
5 Process of manufacturing VCV/CCV.
Number of core and Cross Sq.mm 3X300
6 sectional area of conductor
cores
8 Shape of conductor Round
Thickness of semi-conducting mm 0.6
10
screen
11 Average thickness of insulation mm 3.4
Material of Insulation Cross Linked
13
Polyethylene (XLPE)
Type of non-metallic insulating Semi-conducting
14
screen
Thickness of semi-conducting mm 1.0
15
insulation screen
Number and diameter of copper No./mm Based on design
16
screen strands calculation
Thickness of bedding mm Based on design
19
calculation
Number and diameter of No./mm As per IEC 60502
20
armour wire
Average thickness of PVC over mm Based on design
21
sheath calculation
Nominal diameter of complete mm Based on design
22
cable calculation
Nominal weight per meter of Kg/m Based on design
23
complete cable calculation
Minimum radius of bend round mm 12xD
24
which cable can be laid
Maximum D.C. resistance of Ohm/m Based on design
25
conductor per meter at 20C calculation
Maximum A.C. resistance of Ohm/m Based on design
conductor per meter at a calculation
26
maximum conductor
temperature
Star reactance per meter of Ohm/m Based on design
27
cable at 50Hz calculation

Star capacitance per meter of pF/m Based on design

28
Charging current per conductor mA Based on design
29 per meter at 5000/11000Volts, calculation
50Hz
Minimum current carrying A 565
30 capacity of conductor in ground
at 20 C
Maximum conductor C 90
31 temperature under continuous
loading
Short circuit capacity of the KA Minimum 25
32
cable for 1sec. duration
Conductor temperature at the C 250
33
end of short circuit
34 Earth fault capacity for 1 sec. KA Minimum 10
Screen short circuit withstand KA Minimum 10
35
capacity
Armour short circuit capacity KA Based on design
36
calculation
37 Cable resistance, reactance:
a) for positive sequence Ohm/km Based on design
calculation
b) negative sequence Ohm/km Based on design
calculation
c) zero sequence Ohm/km Based on design
calculation

5.4 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule of Jointing Kits for 11KV, XLPE,
3Cx300 Sq.mm U/G Copper Cable

Sl.
No.
Indoor Termination Kits for 11KV XLPE, 3-Core, 300 mm2 Copper cable
i. Name and address of Shall be furnished
the manufacturer
ii. Type/model of the kits Shall be furnished
iii. Application For 11KV, 3-core, XLPE 300 mm2
Copper Conductors
iv. Installation For Indoor installation in switchgear
terminations
vii. Kit content - Heat shrinkable high voltage -
tubing
Copper Conductors
Outdoor Termination Kits for 11KV XLPE, 3-Core, 300 mm2 Copper cable
the manufacturer
Copper Conductors
iv. Installation For Outdoor installation on
poles/structures
tubing
skirt
- Support insulator
Copper Conductors
Straight-through joint box for 11KV XLPE, 3-Core, 300 mm2 Copper cable


the manufacturer
Copper Conductors
iv. Installation For underground horizontal mounting
tubing
insulating tape
- Estomeric tube
- Roll spring

Copper Cable
Item
Description of Items Unit Manufacturers
Sl. Required Particulars
Particulars
No.
1
Manufacturer
2
Cable
4 Rated Voltage of Cable KV 6/10 (12)
5 Process of manufacturing VCV/CCV.
Number of core and Cross Sq.mm 3X185
6 sectional area of conductor
cores
8 Shape of conductor Round
Thickness of semi-conducting Mm 0.6
10
screen
11 Average thickness of insulation Mm 3.4
Material of Insulation Cross Linked
13
Polyethylene (XLPE)
Type of non-metallic insulating Semi-conducting
14
screen
Thickness of semi-conducting Mm 1.0
15
insulation screen
Number and diameter of copper No./mm Based on design
16
screen strands calculation
Thickness of bedding Mm Based on design
19
calculation
Number and diameter of No./mm As per IEC 60502
20
armour wire
Average thickness of PVC over Mm Based on design
21
sheath calculation
Nominal diameter of complete Mm Based on design
22
cable calculation
Nominal weight per meter of Kg/m Based on design
23
complete cable calculation
Minimum radius of bend round Mm 12xD
24
which cable can be laid
Maximum D.C. resistance of Ohm/m Based on design
25
conductor per meter at 20C calculation
Maximum A.C. resistance of Ohm/m Based on design
conductor per meter at a calculation
26
maximum conductor
temperature
Star reactance per meter of Ohm/m Based on design
27

Star capacitance per meter of pF/m Based on design

28
Charging current per conductor mA Based on design
29 per meter at 5000/11000Volts, calculation
50Hz
Minimum current carrying A 455
30 capacity of conductor in ground
at 20 C
Maximum conductor C 90
31 temperature under continuous
loading
Short circuit capacity of the KA Minimum 20
32
cable for 1 sec. duration
Conductor temperature at the C 250
33
end of short circuit
34 Earth fault capacity for 1 sec. KA Minimum 10
Screen short circuit withstand KA Minimum 10
35
capacity
Armour short circuit capacity KA Based on design
36
calculation
37 Cable resistance, reactance:
a) for positive sequence Ohm/km Based on design
calculation
b) negative sequence Ohm/km Based on design
calculation
c) zero sequence Ohm/km Based on design
calculation

Copper Cable

Sl.
No.
Indoor Termination Kits for 11KV XLPE, 3-Core, 185 mm2 XLPE Copper Cable
the manufacturer
Copper Conductors
iv. Installation For Indoor installation in switchgear
terminations
tubing
Copper Conductors
Outdoor Termination Kits for 11KV XLPE, 3-Core, 185 mm2 XLPE Copper Cable
the manufacturer
Copper Conductors
iv. Installation For outdoor installation on
poles/structures
vi. Cable conductor 185 mm2 Copper Conductor
tubing
skirt
- Support insulator
Copper Conductors

Straight-through joint box for 11KV XLPE, 3-Core, 185 mm2 Copper cable
the manufacturer
Copper Conductors
iv. Installation For underground horizontal mounting
tubing
insulating tape
- Estomeric tube
- Roll spring

6. Drawings
Bidder shall provide appropriate drawings of their products to be offered in this bid.


Supply and Delivery of 12 Meter & 10 Meter Spun Pre-stressed Concrete (SPC)
Poles, 12 Meter & 10 Meter Telescopic Galvanized Steel Poles and Pole fittings
& line hardware

Contents
1. List of Goods and Related Services ........................................................................................... 6-41
2. Delivery and Completion Schedule ........................................................................................... 6-43
3. Technical Specifications ............................................................................................................ 6-47

4. Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule........6-81
5. Drawings .................................................................................................................................... 6-86

List of Goods and Related Services

Lot Name: Supply and Delivery of 12 Meter & 10 Meter Spun Pre-stressed Concrete
(SPC) Poles, 12 Meter & 10 Meter Telescopic Galvanized Steel Poles and Pole
fittings & line hardware
Item No. Name of Goods or Description Unit of Quantity

Related Services Measure
ment
Spun Pre-stressed Concrete (SPC) Poles

01 Supply & Delivery of: Spun Pre-stressed Concrete (SPC) Poles of Nos. 2000
12 Meter, 400 daN
12 Meter, 300 daN
10 Meter, 250 daN
Telescopic Galvanized Steel Poles
04 Supply & Delivery of: Telescopic Galvanized steel Poles of 12 Nos. 500
Meter, 500 daN
Meter, 350 daN
Meter, 300 daN
Pole Fittings and Line Hardware
Supply & Delivery of: Type-A, Pole top assembly for 0 degree to 3 Sets. 1,650
degree position (for Steel).
Supply & Delivery of: Type-A, Pole top assembly for 0 degree to Sets. 1,650
3 degree position (for SPC pole).
02(i) Supply & Delivery of: Type-B, Pole top assembly for 4 degree to Sets. 825
30 degree position (for Steel).
02(ii) Supply & Delivery of: Type-B, Pole top assembly for 4 degree to Sets. 825
03(i) Supply & Delivery of: Type-C, Pole top assembly for 31 degree to Sets. 825
60 degree position (for Steel Pole).
03(ii) Supply & Delivery of: Type-C, Pole top assembly for 31 degree to Sets. 825
04(i) Supply & Delivery of: Type-D, Pole top assembly for 61 degree to Sets. 600
04(ii) Supply & Delivery of: Type-D, Pole top assembly for 61 degree to Sets. 600
05(i) Supply & Delivery of: Type-E, Pole top assembly for Tee-off Sets. 225
position (for Steel Pole).
05(ii) Supply & Delivery of: Type-E, Pole top assembly for Tee-off Sets. 225
position (for SPC pole).
06(i) Supply & Delivery of: Type-F, Transformer Assembly in line Sets. 500

06(ii) Supply & Delivery of: Type-F, Transformer Assembly in line Sets. 500
07(i) Supply & Delivery of: Type-G, Transformer Assembly dead end Sets. 125
07(ii) Supply & Delivery of: Type-G, Transformer Assembly dead end Sets. 125
08(i) Supply & Delivery of: Type-H, Pole top assembly for 0 degree to 3 Sets. 1050
degree position (for Steel).
08(ii) Supply & Delivery of: Type-H, Pole top assembly for 0 degree to Sets. 1050
09(i) Supply & Delivery of: Type-I, Pole top assembly for 4 degree to Sets. 800
30 degree position (for Steel).
09(ii) Supply & Delivery of: Type-I, Pole top assembly for 4 degree to Sets. 800
10(i) Supply & Delivery of: Type-J, Pole top assembly for 31 degree to Sets. 750
10(ii) Supply & Delivery of: Type-J, Pole top assembly for 31 degree to Sets. 750
11(i) Supply & Delivery of: Type-K, Pole top assembly for 61 degree to Sets. 600
11(ii) Supply & Delivery of: Type-K, Pole top assembly for 61 degree to Sets. 600
12 (i) Supply & Delivery of: Type-L, Pole top assembly for Tee-off Sets. 500
12 (ii) Supply & Delivery of: Type-L, Pole top assembly for Tee-off Sets. 500
13 (i) Supply & Delivery of: Type-M, Pole top assembly for Dead end Sets. 500
13 (ii) Supply & Delivery of: Type-M, Pole top assembly for Dead end Sets. 500
position (for SPC Pole).
14 Supply & Delivery of: HT Outrigger Sets. 800
15 Supply & Delivery of: LT Outrigger Sets. 1000
16 Supply & Delivery of: Earthing Rods & Earthing Materials for
Poles & Transformers
(i) Earthing Rods Nos. 10,000
(ii) PVC Insulated Earthing Wire meters 100000
17 Supply & Delivery of: Side Lock Tie for:
(i) ACSR Merlin Nos. 500
(ii) ACSR DOG Nos. 2,500
(iii) ACSR Rabbit Nos. 1,000
18 Supply & Delivery of: Preformed Aurmour Rod for ACSR Merlin Sets. 1,000
19 Supply & Delivery of: Preformed Termination for Guy Nos. 50,000
20 Supply & Delivery of: Galvanized Steel Guy Wire meters. 85,000
21 Supply & Delivery of: Preformed Termination for:
(i) AAC WASP Nos. 3,000
(ii) AAC ANT Nos. 1,500

Delivery and Completion Schedule
The delivery period shall start as of 21 days after the issuance of qualified commitment (QC) on
Letter of Credit from Asian Development Bank (ADB).
The delivery shall be completed within 270 (Two hundred and Seventy) days counting from 21 days
after issuance of QC in the Port of Entry for Goods offered from out side the Purchasers Country and
Ex-Works for Goods offered from within the Purchasers country.
the bid shall be evaluated in the manner and to the extent specified in Section III, Evaluation and
Qualification Criteria.
Required
Arrival Date of
Item Qty. Location Goods or
No. Completion
Date for
Related
Services
Port of Entry for
Goods offered from
270 days
outside the
counting
Purchasers
from 21
Country and Ex-
days after
Works for Goods
issuance of
offered from within
CL.
the Purchasers
country.
01 Spun Pre-stressed Concrete 2000
(SPC) Poles of 12 Meter, 400 Nos.
daN
daN
daN
04 Telescopic Galvanized steel 500
Poles of 12 Meter, 500 daN Nos.
07 Pole Fittings and Line
Hardware
7.1 Type-A, Pole top assembly for 0 1,650
degree to 3 degree position (for Sets.
Steel).

7.2 Type-A, Pole top assembly for 1,650

0 degree to 3 degree position (for Sets.
SPC pole).
7.3 Type-B, Pole top assembly for 4 825
Steel).
7.4 Type-B, Pole top assembly for 4 825
SPC pole).
7.5 Type-C, Pole top assembly for 825
31 degree to 60 degree position Sets.
(for Steel Pole).
7.6 Type-C, Pole top assembly for 825
(for SPC pole).
7.7 Type-D, Pole top assembly for 600
(for Steel Pole).
7.8 Type-D, Pole top assembly for 600
(for SPC pole).
7.9 Type-E, Pole top assembly for 225
Tee-off position (for Steel Pole). Sets.
7.10 Type-E, Pole top assembly for 225

Tee-off position (for SPC pole). Sets.
7.11 Type-F, Transformer Assembly 500

in line position (for Steel Pole). Sets.
7.12 Type-F, Transformer Assembly 500

in line position (for SPC pole). Sets.
7.13 Type-G, Transformer Assembly 125

dead end position (for Steel Sets.
Pole).
7.14 Type-G, Transformer Assembly 125
dead end position (for SPC Sets.
pole).
7.15 Type-H, Pole top assembly for 0 1050
Steel).
7.16 Type-H, Pole top assembly for 1050
0 degree to 3 degree position (for Sets.
SPC pole).
7.17 Type-I, Pole top assembly for 4 800
Steel).
7.18 Type-I, Pole top assembly for 4 800
SPC pole).
7.19 Type-J, Pole top assembly for 31 750
Steel Pole).

7.20 Type-J, Pole top assembly for 750

(for SPC pole).
7.21 Type-K, Pole top assembly for 600
(for Steel Pole).
7.22 Type-K, Pole top assembly for 600
(for SPC pole).
7.23 Type-L, Pole top assembly for 500
Tee-off position (for Steel Pole). Sets.
7.24 Type-L, Pole top assembly for 500

Tee-off position (for SPC pole). Sets.
7.25 Type-M, Pole top assembly for 500

Dead end position (for Steel Sets.
Pole).
7.26 Type-M, Pole top assembly for 500
Dead end position (for SPC Sets.
Pole).
7.27 HT Outrigger 800
Sets.
7.28 LT Outrigger 1000
Sets.
7.29 Earthing Rods & Earthing
Materials for Poles &
Transformers
7.30 Earthing Rods 10,000
Nos.
7.31 PVC Insulated Earthing Wire 100000
meters
7.32 Side Lock Tie for:
7.33 ACSR Merlin 500
Nos.
7.34 ACSR DOG 2,500
Nos.
7.35 ACSR Rabbit Nos.
7.36 Preformed Aurmour Rod for 1,000
ACSR Merlin Sets.
7.37 Preformed Termination for Guy 50,000
Nos.
7.38 Galvanized Steel Guy Wire 85,000
meters.
7.39 Preformed Termination for:
7.40 AAC WASP 3,000
Nos.
7.40 AAC ANT 1,500
Nos.
Seal & Signature of the Bidder: .

Technical Specification
Table of Contents

3.1 General 6-47
3.2 General Design condition 6-47
3.3 Submission with Bid 6-47
3.4 Reference Standards 6-47
3.5 Compliance with specification 6-47
3.6 Design Improvements 6-48
3.7 Designs 6-48
3.8 Suppliers/Manufacturers Responsibility 6-48
3.9 Regulations, Standards etc. 6-48
3.10 Site Conditions 6-48
3.11 Particulars and Gyrantees 6-49
3.12 Approval of Drawings 6-49
3.14 Packing 6-50
3.15 Post Landing Inspection (PLI) 6-50
3.16 Technical Specification of Spun Prestressed concrete (SPC) Poles
3.16.1 General 6-51
3.16.2 Standards 6-51
3.16.3 Inspection and Testing 6-51
3.16.4 Definitions and Abbreviations 6-51
3.16.5 Materials 6-52
3.16.6 Storage and Protection of Materials 6-54
3.16.7 Reinforcement and Pre-stressing Steel Installation 6-54
3.16.8 Mixing, Placing and Curing Concrete 6-57
3.16.9 Concrete Sampling and testing 6-59
3.16.10 Pole moulds and Surface Fninshes 6-61
3.16.11 Pole length, Shape and Design Loading 6-63
3.16.12 Design of Poles 6-64
3.16.13 Testing of Poles 6-65
3.16.14 Failure to satisfy Acceptable criteria 6-67
3.16.15 Quality Assurance 6-68
3.17 Technical Specification for Galvanazied Steel Poles
3.17.1 General 6-68
3.17.5 Materials and Manufactures 6-70
3.17.6 Pole Length, Shape and design loading 6-72
3.17.7 Testing of Poles 6-73
3.17.8 Failure to satisfy acceptable criteria 6-75
3.18 Technical Specifications for pole fittings and Line Hardware
3.18.1 General 6-76
3.18.5 Materials and Manufactures 6-77

3.18.6 Line Hardware 6-78

3.18.8 Drawings 6-80
3.18.9 Schedule for Line Configuration 6-80
3.19 Guranteed Technical Data Schedule for
3.19.1 Spun Pre-Stressed Concrete (SPC) Pole (10 Meter, 250 daN) 6-81
3.19.4 Pole Fittings and Line Hardware 6-84
3.1 General:
The section covers the designs, manufacture, testing, supply and delivery on DESCO store of
all the poles and poles fittings along with the lines hardware for the extending and reinforcing
the overhead 11/0.4KV distribution Network.
3.2 General Design Condition
3.2.1 Factor of Safety:
Minimum factor of safety is 2.0 and these factors shall be obtained under all working loads
and conditions.
3.3 Submission with Bid:
Although all poles shall designs and shall proved by test. Bidders shall demonstrate that their
offer has been carefully assessed and that their bidder proposed designs have been fully
considered in accordance with the detailed requirements of this specification.
To this end, Bidders shall submit the following with their offer otherwise the bid will be
rejected:
a) Detailed drawing of each proposed designs of pole and pole fittings.

b) Detailed calculations for each design.
Notwithstanding such submissions, the actual pole designs to be supplied under the contract
shall be those, which satisfactorily pass the tests required under this section.
3.4 Reference Standards
The Goods and/or Standards referred to in specifications shall govern, in all cases wherever
such reference is made, in case of a conflict between such codes and/or Standards and the
Specifications, the latter shall govern. Such codes and/or standards, referred to shall mean the
latest revisions, amendments/changes adopted and published by the relevant agencies.
Other internationally accepted Standards, which ensure equivalent or better performance than
those specified will also, are accepted.
3.5 Compliance with specification
Notwithstanding any descriptive literature, drawings or illustrations which may have been
submitted with the Bid, all detail other than those shown on the Schedule of Departures will
be deemed to be in accordance with the Specification and Standard Specifications and codes

referred to in the Specification. A Part from those shown in the Schedule of departures, no
departures from the Specification are to be made without written approval of the Engineer.
3.6 Design Improvements
The Purchaser or the Supplier may propose changes in the Specification of the equipment or
quality thereof and if the parties agree upon any such changes, the specification shall be
modified accordingly.
3.7 Designs
Unless stated to the contrary in the Bid, together with a full supporting explanation, the
Supplier/Manufacturer will be deemed to have accepted that the design and layout of the
works are sufficient to ensure reliable and safe operation and freedom from under stressed.
The Contract is to include the whole of the Works, which are described in or implied by the
Contract Documents. Any items omitted from the Contract Documents, which are obviously
necessary for the efficiency and correct operation of the works, shall be deemed to be
included in the Contract price.
3.8 Suppliers/Manufacturers Responsibility
The Supplier/Manufacturer is to familiarize himself with the Bid document, particularly in

regard to the Conditions of contract and Suppliers responsibility.
3.9 Regulations, Standards, etc.
3.9.1 Language
The English language is to be used on all Contract documents and in all correspondence
between the Supplier/Manufacturer and the Engineers of DESCO.
All correspondence, drawings and Operating and Maintenance instructions shall also be
written in English.
3.9.2 Units of Measurement
In all correspondence, in all technical schedules and on all drawings, Metric units of
measurement (System International) shall exclusively be in degrees, with 90 degrees
comprising one right angle.
3.9.3 International Standards
All Poles under this Specification shall conform to the latest editions of IEC or equivalent
Standard unless and otherwise stated herein. Poles offered from a country where the relevant
standards to which the Poles and or Pole fittings better than IEC these are acceptable but
appropriate standards must be quoted in the documents. Full details of references, which
affect the design or performance of Poles, shall be stated in the Bid.
3.10 Site Conditions
3.10.1 Climatic Conditions
a) Climate : Subtropical; Intense sunshine, heavy rain and dust

laden atmosphere.

b) Ambient air temperatures :

(i) Extremities : 5 deg C to 40 deg. C.
(ii) Ambient average annual : 25 deg. C.
(iii) Normal average : 20 deg. C to 35 deg. C.
(iv) Average in any one day : 35 deg. C.
does not exceed
c) Average annual rainfall : 3000 mm
d) Average relative rainfall : 50-100%
e) Maximum wind velocity : 160km/hour
f) Average Isokeraunic Level : 50 days/year
g) Altitude : sea level to 300 meters
The information given in this clause is given solely as a guide for bidders and no
responsibility for its accuracy will be accepted nor will any claim based on this clause be
entertained.
3.10.2 Special Conditions

Poles supplied under this contract will be installed in tropical locations, which can be
considered hostile to its proper operation. Particular problems, which shall receive special
consideration, relate to operation in a hot humid environment, and the presence of insects and
vermin.
3.11 Particulars and Guarantees

Bidders shall furnish full technical information and set out all particulars required in the
schedules. Drawings of all components shall be provided together with the Poles Fittings type
& reference number to ensure their identification. Before the Engineer will issue approval of
shipment, the manufacturer will be required to supply type test certificates and individual
certificates for all goods supplied to testify that the goods comply with the applicable
standards. If the test proves unsatisfactory, approval of shipment will not be issued.
3.12 Approval of Drawings
No work shall be performed in connection with the fabrication and manufacture of the offered
goods until the drawings and technical data have been approved. The cost of supplying
drawing shall be borne by the supplier.
At the time of delivery of the above equipment, the supplier shall supply ten (10) sets of all
approved technical data and drawings in bound book form along with manufacturers
catalogue & manual of the components to the following offices:
Executive Director (Engineering),

Dhaka Electric Supply Company Limited (DESCO).
22/B Faruk Sarani, Nikunja-2, Dhaka-1229, Bangladesh.
Telephone # 0088 02 8900110-11, Fax # 0088 02 8900100, Email # sed.ho@desco.org.bd

3.13 Inspection and Testing
3.13.1 The Purchaser shall have the right to inspect/test the goods/materials to confirm their
3.13.2 The purchaser shall be entitled at all reasonable time during manufacture to inspect,
examine and test of goods/materials at the manufacturers premises, workmanship
and performance.
3.13.3 The Supplier shall, after consulting the purchaser, give the Purchaser reasonable
notice in writing of the date on and the place at which any material or equipment will
be ready for testing as provided in the contract and unless the purchaser shall attend at
the place so named on date, which the supplier has stated in his notice, the supplier
may proceed with the tests, which shall be deemed to have been made in the
purchasers presence, and shall forth with forward to the purchaser duly certified
copies of test readings.
When the purchaser intends to attend the test he shall promptly inform the supplier
accordingly in writing, so that he can take action. The purchaser shall give the
supplier timely notice in writing of his intention to attend the test.
3.13.4 Where the supplier provides for tests on the premises of the supplier or of any
test efficiently. These tests shall be performed as per relevant IEC/BS Standard or
equivalent and only routine tests as agreed upon, will be performed.
3.13.5 As a when the purchaser is satisfied that any materials/equipment shall have passes
the tests referred to in this clause, purchaser shall notify the contractor in writing to
that effect.
3.13.6 Should any inspected/tested goods fail to conform to the specification, the Purchaser
shall have the right to reject any of the items or complete batch if necessary. In that
case Supplier has to replace the Equipment and to make good of them without any
financial involvement to the Purchaser. In case any of the Equipment found not
conforming to the specification at the time of post landing Inspection, the supplier
will in no way be relived from the responsibility of replacing them on making them
good at their own cost, despite the Equipment where found good at the time of Pre-
shipment Inspection.
3.13.7 Nothing in this clause shall in any way release the supplier from any warranty or other
obligations under the contract.
3.14 Packing:
Goods are to be delivered in a way to protect from damage during transportation and storage.
Specific care shall be taken for protection in store and reference is made to the climatic
condition prevailing in Bangladesh.
arrival of the goods/materials at the designated store of DESCO. The program of such
inspection shall be intimated to the representative of Supplier. The PLI committee shall refer
in its report, the exact/assessed quantity of goods/materials. The Post Landing Inspection of
goods/materials shall generally cover the following, but not limited to it:
(iv) Visual Inspection of goods/materials;

(v) Conformance with approved drawings with respect to dimensions/type/size.

(vi) Where necessary, appropriate test on supplied goods on random sample basis.
3.16 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF SPUN PRESTRESSED

CONCRETE (SPC) POLES
3.16.1 General
This specification includes the design, manufacture, testing and delivery to Site of Spun Pre-
stressed Concrete (SPC) poles.
The design working loads for the poles are specified in this specification.
The Supplier is responsible for calculations necessary to establish the cross-sectional

dimensions of the poles and the required reinforcing so that the poles can resist the specified
working loading in accordance with various requirements set out in this specification. The
person responsible for such calculations shall be experienced in the structural use of concrete
in general and in the design of pre-stressed concrete poles in particular.
3.16.2 Standards
The equipments specified herein shall conform to the latest version of the appropriate
recognized international standards. In particular:
BS 8110 : 1985 Structural use of concrete, parts 1 and 2

BS 4449 Specification for hot rolled steel bars for the reinforcement of
concrete.
BS 1881 Methods of Testing of Concrete.
BS 812 Testing of Aggregates.
ASTM C39 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens.
BS 12 Specification for Ordinary and Rapid Hardening Portland Cement.
BS 5075 Specification for concrete Admixtures. Specification for High Tensile
Steel wire and strand for Pre-stressing of Concrete.
BS 5750 : 1979 Quality System.
If the bidder offers other equivalent standards full details including copies in English
Language such standards shall be submitted with the offer.
3.16.3 Inspection and Testing
A representative appointed by the Engineers of DESCO will inspect the manufactured items
at the manufacturers plant.Tests shall be preformed in accordance with the relevant standards
unless otherwise specified in this specification. Production item not meeting the approved
specification will be rejected.
3.16.4 Definitions and Abbreviations
The following definitions and abbreviations apply to this Specification:
3.16.4.1 Definitions

Failure Inability of the pole when under test to support further load or when
deformation or cracking of the pole renders it unserviceable.
Longitudinal Direction The horizontal direction parallel to the run of the conductors.
Transverse Direction The horizontal direction at right angles to the run of the conductors.
Ultimate The strength at which the pole will not accept any furthers applied force
or when deformation or cracking of the pole renders it unserviceable.
Tendon Means any pre-stressing wire conforming to technical specification as
described in this section or any discrete group of such wires stressed in
one operation.
3.16.4.2 Abbreviation
A.S.T.M. : American Society for Testing and Materials.
B.S : British standard
Mpa : Mega Pascal = 1N/sq. Mm
3.16.5 Materials
3.16.5.1 General
All materials shall conform to the relevant standard specifications refereed to in this
Specification. Reinforcing Steel, pre-stressing steel and cement shall be new and undamaged.
Aggregates for manufacturing concrete shall be clean and of their best respective kinds. Any
materials found to be defective will be rejected by the Engineer and replaced with approved
materials by the Supplier at his own expense.
Manufacturers test certificates for all reinforcing and pre-stressing steel shall be supplied to
the Engineer. These test certificates shall show compliance with the relevant Standard
Specification in all respects and shall be issued by an independent testing laboratory
acceptable to the Engineer. If the manufacturers test certificates are not available and if the
Engineer requires it then the Supplier is responsible for arranging all testing requested by the
engineer.
The test information so obtained must be sufficient to satisfy the Engineer that the item being
tested conforms to the relevant Standard Specification.
The Supplier shall allow for the cost of all such testing in his Bid price.
3.16.5.2 Reinforcing Steel
All reinforcing bars shall comply with B.S 4449. They shall have a minimum yield stress of
275 MPa (2800kg/cm).
Any longitudinal reinforcing bars shall have a deformed profile (surface of bar provided with
lugs or protrusions). All reinforcing bars used to form ties or stirrups shall have a plain round
profile only.
3.16.5.3 Pre-stressing Steel

Pre-stressing steel shall be indented, cold drawn, low relaxation class stress relieved high
tensile wire or 7-wire strand to B. S. 5869/1980 wit a minimum diameter of 5mm. The steel
shall have a minimum ultimate tensile stress of 1650 Mpa and a minimum 0.2% proof stress
of 1400 Mpa. the 1000 hr relaxation at 70% initial stress shall be 2% maximum.
3.16.5.4 Cement
Cement shall be Ordinary Portland or Rapid Hardening, Portland complying with BS 12.
Other cement types can be used only after receiving the Engineers approval in writing.
3.16.5.5 Aggregates
Fine aggregate (sand) shall consist of clean material or manufactured sands and coarse
aggregate shall consist of clean gravel, crused gravel, or crused stone. The maximum nominal
size of the coarse aggregates shall be 10mm to 12mm. Both the fine and coarse aggregates
shall comply with the requirements of BS 812.
Prohibited Aggregate
Coming from feldspathic or schistous rock

Containing charcoal or their residue such as coke, ashes, clinkers, finders.
Brick
Sulfate and sulfide must be in such quantities that the whole proportion, in sulfur trioxide, be
less than 1 percent of the mass.
Aggregates, which are dredged from the sea, shall be washed in fresh water before use.
3.16.5.6 Water
All water used for mixing of concrete shall clean and free of any dissolved or un-dissolved
impurities likely to be harmful to the cement, aggregate or the steel reinforcement.
The use of seawater is prohibited.
The water shall contain less than:
2000 ppm of suspended matter

1500 ppm of dissolved salt
3.16.5.7 Admixtures
No admixtures shall be added to the concrete mix unless the period approval of the engineer
has been obtained in writing.
Under no circumstances shall calcium chloride or any admixtures containing calcium chloride
be permitted in the concrete used to manufacture the pre-stressed concrete poles.
All admixtures shall comply with BS 5075. Approval by the Engineer of the use of any
admixtures shall in no way relieve the Supplier and his supplier of their responsibility in
regard to a production in quality or durability of the concrete used in the manufacture of
poles.
3.16.5.8 Form Release agent

All form of work shall be coated with a suitable form release agent. Under no circumstances
shall waste engine oil or any other oil, which will affect the finished appearance of the pole,
be used. Forms shall be coated before fixing in their final position and the release agent shall
not come in contact with any reinforcing steel, pre-stressing steel or embedded items.
Coverage must be complete and uniform and any excess shall be removed from the lower
section of the forms before placing and concrete.
3.16.6 Storage and Protection of Materials
3.16.6 .1 Cement
Cement shall be stored in a suitable weather tight enclosure on a board platform raised off the
ground. The enclosure should be such that free circulation of air around the bags of cement is
kept to minimum.
Any cement that has become damp, caked or lumpy shall not be used. Concrete bathing
operations shall be organized that cement that has been longest at the place of manufacture of
the poles is used first.
3.16.6.2 Aggregates
Both fine and coarse aggregates shall be stored so that they are kept clean and free from
contamination and are not subjected to segregation. Where a clean hard surface is not a
violable for the stockpiles the bottom 150 mm of the aggregate piles, which are in contact
with the ground, shall not be used.
3.16.6.3 Reinforcing Steel
All reinforcing shall be stored in a clean dry place on platforms off the ground. Grease, oil,
paint over any other substance that will effect the bond of the reinforcement shall not be allow
to come in contact with it. If it does then all such substances shall be cleaned off the
reinforcement before it is placed in the whole moulds.
3.16.6.4 Pre-stressing Steel
All pre-stressing tendons shall be stored in a clean dry place off the ground and must be kept
dry at all times. All loose surface rust, and protective oil, or other contaminants that will
effect the bond of the tendons shall be thoroughly removed before installing them in the pole
moulds. Any part of the tendons that have become pitted, have any tears or nicks, or are
permanently deformed or otherwise damaged shall be discarded.
If necessary, they Engineer shall instruct the Supplier to have sufficient mechanical tests
carried out on the tendons to ensure that their strength has not been impaired in any way.
3.16.7 Reinforcement and Pre-stressing Steel Installation
3.16.7.1 Covers
The cover from the outermost reinforcing and/or pre-stressing steel to the nearest permanent
surface of the concrete member, including the surface of holes cast in the member, shall be
not less than 20mm, except for spun cast poles this minimum cover may be reduced to 12mm.
Holes cast using UPVC sleeves permanently adhered to this concrete surface may have a
cover of 5mm minimum to the surface of concrete protected by the UPVC sleeve.

All steel shall accurately place and shall be held in position during manufacture. Bar chairs
shall be made of non-corrosive and impervious material.
Pre-stressing tendons shall pass through rigidly held guide plates at the ends of members to
maintain the minimum covers.
3.16.7.2 Spacing
The clear spacing between two parallel reinforcing bars of pre-stressing tendons shall be at
least equal to the nominal bar diameter, 1.33 times the minimum nominal size of the
aggregate or 10mm.
Tendons can be placed with different spacing to the above and in bundles provided that test
results show satisfactory ultimate behavior with respect to:
i. Compression and tension stresses in the tendon anchorage zone.

ii. Spelling of concrete.
iii. Anchorage of pre-tensioned tendons.
iv. Avoidance of corrosion of tendons at the end of the element.
v. Placing the concrete between tendons and compaction of concrete around tendons.
3.16.7.3 Stirrups and Ties
Bends in stirrups and ties shall have a diameter on the inside of the bar not less than the
enclosure bar or 2 times the diameter of the stirrups or tie, whichever is the greater.
The ends of the stirrups ties shall be anchored with a minimum of 90 deg. Bend plus a straight
extension of 8 bar diameter but not less than 65mm. They shall be firmly attached to the
supporting tendons/reinforcement using soft wire ties.
3.16.7.4 Welding
Welding or Tack-welding of reinforcement or pre-stressing tendons will not be permitted.
3.16.7.5 Pre-stress in Tendon Stressing
All stressing operations shall be carried out under the direct supervision of a person who is
thoroughly experienced with all aspects pre-tensioned pre-stressed concrete construction.
The stressing procedure adopted shall ensure that the force in a tendon increases at reasonably
constant rate. After stressing and anchoring, the force in a tendon shall be the initial force
specified on the manufacturing drawings. During stressing the maximum force applied to a
tendon shall not exceed 0.75 times its ultimate tensile strength.
The required amount of pre-stressing forced shall be measured by both tendon elongation and
jack force and pressure. If the two measurements differ by more than 5 percent, the cause
shall be ascertained and the appropriate corrections made.
Tendon elongation shall be calculated from the actual load/elongation gaps supplied by the
steel manufacturer and where appropriate anchorage draw-in shall be accurately assessed and
allowed for. A correction shall be applied to the total elongation observed to compensate for
any initial and slackness.

Jack and anchorage friction shall be assessed and an appropriate correction made to the
jacking pressure.
Records shall be kept off all stressing operations they shall include.
a) Amount of Tendon elongation up to the stage of anchoring the tendon.

b) Allowance for anchorage draw-in.
c) Jack force at anchorage.
d) Allowance of jack friction.
e) Manufacturers identification for pre-stressing tendons used.
f) Date and time stressing.
g) Date and time of de-stressing.
h) Curing sequence and concrete strength at time of de-stressing.
i) Identification mark placed on each particular pole.
Time jacking force shall be measured to an accuracy of 0.025 times the pre-stressing force
and the tendon elongation to an accuracy of 2mm.
Safety precautions during and after all stressing operations shall be taken to safeguard persons
from injury and equipment from damage, which, may be caused by the sudden release of
stored energy in the stressing system and tendons.
If the tendons are stressed then; left for more than 2(two) weeks before being fully surrounded
with concrete, they shall be removed from the moulds and discarded.
Pre-stressing equipment shall be maintained in a serviceable condition and its calibration and
accuracy checked at least every 3 months.
3.16.7.6 Distressing
The transfer of pre-stressed in to the harden concrete shall take place gradually and in such a
determined order that tensile stresses sufficient to cause cracking are not induced in the
concrete. Immediately after distressing, the minimum stress in the tendons shall not exceed
0.70 the ultimate tensile stress of those tendons.
If all the tendons are not to be released simultaneously than the releasing sequence shall be
shown on the manufacturers drawings.
Any releasing device shall be so designed that during the period between stressing and
distressing, the tension in the pre-stressing tendons does not alter. It shall also be designed so
that there is no increase in the stress in the tendons above the stress in the tendons just prior to
distressing.
3.16.7.7 Cutting and Finishing Tendons
After distressing is completed the ends of the tendons shall be cut off flush with the surface of
the concrete.
If flame cutting is used, there shall be an excess of oxygen in the flame and the cutting shall
take place as rapidly as possible.
The ends of the poles shall be coated with coal tar pitch epoxy paint after flush trimming the
tendons.

3.16.8 Mixing, Placing and Curing Concrete
3.16.8.1 Mix Design
Full details of the components forming the concrete mix proposed to be used by the
supplier/manufacturer shall be submitted to the engineer for his assessment at least 2(two)
weeks before any concreting operations are commenced. Once the Engineer has approved the
proposed mix, it shall not be varied by the supplier/manufacturer unless the Engineers re-
approval has been obtained. The concrete mix shall be designed and tested and their
submission shall include the following information.
a) Source, nature and grading of both the fine and coarse aggregates.
b) Type and supplier/manufacturer of the cement to be used.
c) Protection by weight of both the fine and coarse aggregates.
d) Weight of cement per cubic meter of concrete.
e) Water-cement ration by weight.
f) Estimated slump of the mix.
g) Arithmetic mean compression strength of the mix at 7(seven) days and 28 (twenty eight)
days using cylinder compression test sample plus the standard deviation of the test
strengths and the number of cylinders tested.
Any admixture specified for inclusion in the concrete mixes or that the supplier/manufacturer
intends to use in his mixes (and they have had the prior approval of the Engineer) shall be
included in this trial mixes.
The ratio of weight of the fine aggregates (sand) to the total weight of aggregates shall be
between 0.35 to 0.50. The minimum cement content shall be 400 kg/cub.m and the maximum
water cement ration by weight shall be 0.45.
The supplier/manufacturer shall allow for the cost of all such testing in his bid as swell as any
further testing and additional reporting that the engineer may required.
3.16.8.2 Mixing of Concrete
All concrete shall be mixed in power driven mixers and the concrete making materials shall
be accurately measured to ensure the production of uniform batches of concrete. Volume and
the proportions in each batch adjusted to suit whole bags of cement may measure the
materials. Only full-unbroken bags of cement may be used. Bags of cement which have
practically set, contain any lumps, or have become wet any stage shall not be used.
Volume measurement shall be carried out using well-proportioned gauge boxes. Under no
circumstances will shovels proportion the volumes. The gauge boxes shall be loose filled with
the materials being measured then struck off level with a straight edge then discharges in to
the mixer. The required volume of mixing water shall be adjusted to allow for the free
moisture contained in the aggregates.
Personnel of in charge of the concrete mixing operations shall be trained and experienced in
this method of concrete production.
All concrete shall be mixed for minimum of 1-1/2 minutes from the time the last of the
materials have been placed in the mixing drum. The mixing shall continue until the materials
are thoroughly and uniformly mixed and the concrete is uniform in color and texture. The

entire batch must be discharged from the mixer before recharging commences. Each batch of
the concrete shall have a similar appearance.
3.16.8.3 Conveying and placement of concrete
Concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to moulds by a method that prevents segregation
or loss of the ingredients. It shall be placed as nearly practicable in its final position to avoid
segregation due to re-handling of flowing.
Placement of concrete shall be at such a rate that the concrete is at all times plastic and flows
readily into the spaces between the reinforcement. No concrete which has practically
hardened or been contaminated by foreign materials shall be deposited in the moulds, nor
shall be-tempered concrete or concrete that has been re-mixed after initial set be used.
The placement of concrete in the moulds shall be completed within hour after the
introduction of the mixing water to the cement and the aggregates in the concrete mixer. Each
mould shall be filled with concrete as a continuous operation. Construction joint will not be
permitted in the poles. Should there be an interruption during the placement of concrete into a
mould such that initial set occurs to the deposited concrete then that pole shall be discarded.
3.16.8.4 Conveying and placement of concrete of Concrete
All concrete shall be consolidated in the moulds using high frequency internal or external
vibrators. The amount of vibrations shall be uniform along the length of the mould and shall
be carefully controlled so that adequate consolidation of the concrete is achieved without
causing segregation of the mix ingredients by over vibrations. Particular attention should be
given to achieving adequate consolidation at the ends of the pre-stressed concrete poles to
improve the bond between pre-stressing tendons and concrete.
If using external vibrators, they shall be rigidly clamped to the framework before
commencing vibration and the concrete shall be placed in layers of suitable depth and
vibrated sufficiently to expel all air before the next layer of concrete is placed.
3.16.8.5 Protection and Curing Concrete
During the initial stage of hardening the concrete shall be protected from the direct rays of the
sun and from drying winds. The moulds containing the hardened concrete shall not be
disturbed or shifted unless it can be shown that such movements will not impart any
damaging stress to the hardening concrete.
All concrete shall be cured in an area that ensures it stays saturated or nearly saturated during
the curing period.
a) Moist Curing at Ambient Temperature.
All surface of pole exposed to the atmosphere shall be constantly wet or damp for at least
7(seven) days after casting. Concrete manufactured from rapid hardening Portland cement
shall be moist cured for at least 4(four) days.
b) Curing at Elevated Temperature.
Curing at elevated temperature is permitted subject to the following precaution.

i. Adequate means shall e provided to prevent moisture loss from the concrete from the
time to time of initial set to the end of the elevated temperature curing cycle.
ii. An initial maturing period shall be allowed after casting the concrete and before any
increase above ambient temperature begins. This maturing period shall be measured
from the time of completion of casting and shall be such that the product of time and
ambient temperature at the place of casting the concrete is not less than 40 deg. C
hours (e.g. 2 hours at 20 deg. C to 40 deg. C, hours). During this maturity period the
surface of the concrete mass shall not exceed 30 deg. C.
iii. All pins used to form holes in the pole and other figments, which pass through the
mould, and concrete shall be withdrawn to prevent damage to the concrete caused by
differential expansion between the mould and the concrete.
iv. After the maturity period the heat may be introduced to the concrete at a rate that
limits the temperature rise to a maximum of 24 deg. C hours. Under no circumstances
shall the temperature rise during any 15 minutes period exceeds 6 deg. C.
v. The maximum temperature during the cycle shall not exceed 75 deg. C.
vi. The rate of cooling of the concrete and the removal of any steam covers, blankets, etc.
shall be controlled to prevent any damage due to thermal shock or differential
cooling.
vii. The heat source shall be well distributed to ensure that a uniform temperature
distribution exists in the concrete and that no local overheating occurs to the concrete
mass, the pre-casting moulds or to any test specimens.
Concrete test specimens shall be cured in exactly the same manner as the concrete poles.
Temperature records shall be dept of the following.
i. The temperature during the initial maturing period.

ii. At hourly intervals during the temperature rise period.
iii. At 3 hourly intervals during the maximum constant temperature period and at the end
of this period after shirring off the heat source.
Elevated temperature cured concrete poles shall be moist cured for a further 4 days at ambient
temperatures. During this period, all surface of the pole exposed to the atmosphere shall be
kept constantly wet or dump.
The elevated temperature curing method chosen shall produce concrete with along term
strength and durability at least equivalent to concrete, which has been moist curing at ambient
temperatures.
3.16.9 Concrete Sampling and Testing
3.16.9 .1 Slump Test
These shall be taken during all concrete placing operations. Any batch of concrete whose
slump exceeds the value submitted with the mix design (as described earlier) by more than
25% or 25mm, which ever is the greater, shall be rejected and not placed in the moulds.
Slump test shall be carried out in accordance with BS 1881.
3.16.9 .2 Compression strength samples
Samples for compression strength test shall be moulded in either 150mm cubes, 100mm
diameter x 200mm high cylinders or 150mm diameter x 300mm high cylinders for the

purposes of this specification to convert from cylindrical strength to cube strength divide the
cylinder strength by the following factors:
Cylinder Strength Conversion Factor
15 Mpa and less 0.77

20 Mpa 0.82
25 Mpa 0.86
30 Mpa and more 0.91
A sample shall consist of 4 cubes of cylinder made concurrently from the same batch of
concrete two (2) of the cubes of cylinders shall be used to establish the 28 days compression
strength and two (2) of the cubes of cylinders shall be used to establish the rate of gain in
strength of concrete before distressing the tendons (as described earlier).
All samples shall be taken moulded and cured in accordance with the procedures ib BS 1881
except that cylinders or cubes taken to check the rate of gain of compression strength before
28 days shall be cured in the same manner as the concrete poles from which the samples are
taken.
A random sampling procedure shall be adopt and the minimum frequency of sampling of the
concrete shall be 1(one) per 20 poles, which ever the greater number of samples but not less
than 1(one) sample per day.
All samples shall be marked with the sampling date and an appropriate identification mark.
3.16.9.3 Compression Strength Test
Testing of the compression strength samples shall be carried out in accordance with the
procedures in ASTM C39-72 (Cylinder) or BS 1881 (Cubes).
The minimum required 28 days compression strength of all concrete used to manufacture
concrete poles shall be as follows:
Pre-cast Concrete fitments - 30Mpa

Pre-stressed Concrete Poles - 40 Mpa
The minimum required compression strength before the transfer of any pre-stress force into
the concrete is permitted should be 30 Mpa. If it can be demonstrated by test to the Engineers
satisfaction that the serviceability or the transfer may be permitted but shall not be less that 25
Mpa.
3.16.9.4 Acceptance Criteria for Compression Strength
The test strength of any sample shall be the average strength of two cylinders or cubes from
the same sample.
(a) 28 days compression strength.
(i) The arithmetic mean value of test strengths of the last thirty samples of a particular
grade of concrete exceeds the required 28 days compression strength by at least 1.65
times the standard deviation of the test strengths.
(ii) No value of test strength is less than the greater of the required 28 days compression
strength minus 1.35 times the standard deviation and 0.8 times the required 28 days
compression strength.

The frequency of assessing compliance with the above shall be as follows:
(i) Compliance with paragraph (i) above shall be assessed at intervals not exceeding 1
month.
(ii) Compliance with paragraph (ii) above shall be assessed daily.
If any of the above requirements are not meet modifications shall be made by the
supplier/Manufacturer to his concrete mix proportions. Such modifications shall be carried
out in consultation with the Engineer and shall be to his approval.
In the event that insufficient records are available to calculate a deviation from the test
strength ( a minimum of 30 and a maximum of 100) then the following assumed standard
deviations shall be used:
Required Compression Strength Assumed standard deviation
Mpa Mpa
20 4.5
25 4.8
30 5.2
40 5.9
The calculated standard deviation shall be brought up to date after every change of mix design
and at least once a month.
a) Compression Strength to Measure early Strength Gain.
Where samples are taken to measure the early strength gain of the concrete then the concrete
shall be considered acceptable it the average strength of at least two cylinders or cubes
exceeding any one specimen is not less than 0.85 times the required early compression
strength.
If any of the above requirements are not met then the transfer or pre-stress or the application
of loading to the poles shall be delayed until the required early compression strength has been
obtained. A Schmidt rebound hammer can be used to monitor such additional strength gain
provided it has been properly calibrated beforehand.
3.16.9.5 Cost of Testing
The supplier/manufacturer shall allow in his bid for the cost of all testing necessary for
concrete production control. The shall include where necessary or instructed by the Engineer,
testing of all the components used to manufacturer the concrete to ensure they conform to the
relevant BS standards. All such testing shall be carried out in an approved independent testing
laboratory unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
3.16.10 Pole moulds and Surface Finishes
Moulds shall be designed, constructed and finished to ensure that they can be removed
without damaging the hardened concrete, and they shall be securely braced and supported to
prevent sagging and bulging during the deposition of the concrete. Joints in the materials used
to manufacture the mould shall be tight and shall not permit any leakage of cement paste from
the concrete mix. Adjacent faces of each joint shall be accurately aligned to prevent steps
being formed in the finished surface of the pole. Holes in the walls of the moulds used for

retaining pins, which from bolt holes in the finished poles shall be provided with flexible
sales or some similar means to prevent the loss of any cement paste from the concrete mix.
If elevated temperature curing of the concrete is to be employed with the moulds in place
around the hardened concrete then changes in cross-section of the moulds shall be carefully
detailed to ensure that differential expansion between the mould and the hardened concrete
does not cause any damage of cracking of the concrete reasonable profit shall be determined
by the Purchasers representative in accordance with the provisions of Sub-Clause 3.5 and
shall be added to the Contract Price.
If, for reasons not attributable to the Contractor, a Test after Completion on the Works or any
Section cannot be completed during the contract Period (or any other period agreed upon by
the Purchaser and the Contractor), then the works or such Section shall be deemed to have
passed such Test after Completion.
3.16.10.1 Re-testing
If the works, or a Section, fail to pass the Tests after Completion, the Purchaser or the
Contractor may require such failed Tests, and the Tests after Completion on any related work,
to be repeated under the same terms and conditions. If such failure and re-testing result from
default of the contractor and cause the Purchaser to incur additional costs, such costs shall be
recoverable from the Contractor by the Purchaser, and may be deducted by the Purchaser
from any monies due, or to become due, to the Contractor.
3.16.10.2 Failure to Pass tests after Completion
If the following conditions apply, namely:
(a) the Works, or a section, fail to pass any or all of the Tests after Completion,
(b) The relevant sum payable as liquidated damages for such failure is stated (or its method
of calculation is defined) in the Appendix to Bid, and
(c) the contractor pays such relevant sum to the Purchaser during the Contract Period,
Then the Works or such section shall be deemed to have passed such Tests after completion.
If the works, or a Section, fail to pass a Test after completion and the Contractor in
consequence proposes to make any adjustment or modification thereto, the Purchaser does not
wish such adjustment or modification to be made until a time that the convenient to the
Purchaser. In such event, the Contractor shall remain liable to carry out the adjustment or
modification, and to satisfy such Test within a reasonable time of being notified to do so by
the Purchasers Representative. If, however, the Purchasers Representative fails to give any
such notice during the Contract Period, the Contractor shall be relieved of any such obligation
and the Works or Section (as the case may be) shall be deemed to have passed such Test after
completion.
If the Contractor incurs additional cost as a result of any unreasonable delay by the Purchaser
in permitting access to the Works or Plant by the Contractor, either to investigate the causes
of failure to pass a Test after Completion, or to carry out any adjustments or modifications,
then the Contractor shall be paid the additional cost, plus reasonable profit, caused by such
delay.

3.16.10.3 Lifting and Handling
Poles shall not be lifted or handled until the concrete has attained strength of not less than
twice the stress induced by the methods of handling and lifting.
The designer shall show on the construction drawings and the manufacturer shall show on the
poles the points at which the poles are to be fitted and supported and only these points shall
be used for lifting and supporting during manufacture and stockpiling. When stacked in
stockpiles, timber bearers placed between each unit at shall separate each pole or adjacent to
the designated lifting points. Timber, bearers shall be placed only on lines vertically above
each other.
3.16.11 Pole Length, Shape and Design Loading
3.16.11.1 General
Included in the bid documents are schedules detailing the total number of each class of pole to
be supplied under this contract and the required numbers that are to be delivered to the
locations nominated in the schedule.
3.16.11.2 Pole Length and Shape
The standard overall length of poles manufactured under this contract shall be of:
12 meters
10 meters
The pole configuration shall be a multidirectional a round hollow section (Spun Type P.C.)
capped top and bottom.
The Bidder shall submit a detailed description of the methods of pole manufacture and
detailed calculations for all aspects of design of the poles.
3.16.11.3 Design Loading
The standard design working loads in the transverse direction shall be as follows:
Total Length Design Load Applied 300mm Design Vertical Load

Bellow Pole Top
10m Pole 350 daN 200 daN
Each pole shall be designed to have adequate strength under the ultimate design load (2.5 x
Design Load). The pole shall be designed on breaking strength and factor of safety on
breaking strength shall be 2.5.
3.16.11.4 Wind Pressure
Following wind pressure have to be considered in addition to the design load by the
manufacturer.
Wind Pressure on Round Surface 61 kg/sq. mm

Wind Pressure on Flat Surface 96 kg/sq. mm
Wind Pressure on polygonal Surface 87/ kg/sq. mm

3.16.12 Design of Poles
3.16.12.1 General
Each class of poles shall be design to have adequate strength under the ultimate design loads
(2.5 x Design Loads). The pole shall be designed on breaking strength and factor of safety on
breaking strength shall be 2.5.
Serviceability calculations shall also be made to ensure adequate performance of the poles
under the design loads described above. Pole shall remain un-cracked up to the maximum
design-working load.
3.16.12.2 Design for Serviceability
3.16.12.3 Loss of Pre-stress
To determine the effective pre-stress on the pole, allowances shall be made for immediate and
deferred (time dependent) losses in accordance with section 4.8 and 4.9 of BS 8110: part 1
and section 7 of BS 8110: part 2, 1985.
An alternative reference may be used to estimate the pre-stress losses but full details of any
such references shall be included with the design calculations.
3.16.12.4 Permissible Concrete Stresses
The following are the maximum permissible concrete stresses allowed in the pre-stressed
concrete poles when subjected to normal handling loads and loading up to the design working
loads. When assessing the stress due to handling, transportation, and erection the actual
strength of the concrete at the time of handling shall be substituted in the following formulae,
if less than the 28 days cylinder compression strength.
(a) Comprehensive stress

Cube Cylinder
At transfer 0.55 fci 0.6 f ci
After allowing for all Pre-stressed 0.55 fc 0.55 fc
losses
Where f ci = Compression strength at transfer.
fc = 28 days compression strength.
refer to clause 3.7.3 for specified concrete strength.
(b) Tensile Stress

Cube Cylinder
Immediately after transfer 0.45 sqr. fci 0.5 sqr. f ci

After allowing for all Pre-stressed 0.45 sqr. fci 0.5 sqr. fc
losses

3.16.12.5 Permissible Tendon stresses
Immediately after transfer of tendon forces in to the concrete the maximum permissible
tension in the pre-stressing steel shall not exceed 0.70 x ultimate tensile stress of the pre-
stressing steel.
3.16.12.6 Ultimate Strength Design
The ability of a cross section of any part of a pole to be able to resist the internal stresses
generated by the design ultimate loads shall be calculated using the ultimate strength design
method.
For pre-stressed concrete poles, the methods detailed in BS 8110: part 1, 1985 shall be used.
Allowance may be made for any un-tensioned longitudinal reinforcing steel when calculating
the effective ultimate strength of the pole.
3.16.13 Testing of Poles
3.16.13.1General
The supplier/manufacturer shall make all arrangements and provide all facilities for pole
testing detailed herein. Each class of pole shall be subject to 2(two) types of tests:
a) Type Test (Destruction Tests)
These shall be carried out to prove that each class of pole satisfies all the design requirements
set out in these specifications.
Manufacture of poles to be supplied under this contract shall not commence until designs
have been successfully type tested and the Engineer has certified the same.
b) Proof Tests (Acceptance Tests)
These shall be carried out periodically to check the consistency of the standard of
manufacture. Poles, which successfully pass proof tests, may form part of the contract supply.
None of the above testing shall be carried out on a pole until the concrete has attained its
minimum required 28 days cylinder compression strength or before 21 days after
manufacture. Each pole shall be in its normal air-dry condition.
3.16.13.2Testing Arrangement
Poles shall be tested in the horizontal position in a testing arrangement similar to that shown
on drawing no. 1. The testing arrangement shall be provided with sufficient support to ensure
that bending moments developed by the self-weight of the pole are minimum. This support
shall be detailed to give no horizontal resistance to the applied loads.
The accuracy of all loads and deflection measuring equipment shall be +/- 2%.

3.16.13.3 Observation of Testing.
All test shall be carried out by the supplier/manufacturer and the Engineers of DESCO shall
witness all aspects.
The supplier/manufacturer shall give the Purchaser/Engineer a minimum of 72 hours notice

before commencing any tests.
The costs of all the above testing shall be allowed for in the bid price. This shall include any
additional testing instructed to be carried out by the Engineer/Purchaser to prove that a class
of pole satisfied all design requirements.
3.16.13.5 Type Test
These shall be carried out before full scale manufacture of a class of pole commences; after
any changes are made to the approved design of a class of pole; or at any time the
Engineer/Purchaser considers necessary to confirm that any class of poles still satisfy the
design requirements.
A sample considering of 3(three) poles from each class of poles, similar in all essential
features or design and construction to those purchased, shall be subject to the Type Test and
must give evidence that the poles comply with the acceptance criteria of this specification.
The test arrangement shall be similar to that in drawing no. 1. The test shall be carried out in
2(two) stages.
a) 1st Stage
The load shall be gradually and uniformly applied in increments of 20% of the Ultimate
design load up to 120% of the design-working load. At each increment of load the deflection
of the pole tip shall be measured. The 120% loading shall be maintained for a 5(five) minutes.
The load shall then be gradually reduced to zero and the amount of permanent deflection of
the pole tip recorded.
b) 2nd Stage
the test load shall gradually re-applied up to the working load and the deflection recorded.
The load shall then be increased in 20% increments until failure occurs. At each load
increment the load and deflection shall be recorded.
The following particulars shall be recorded for each test made:
(a) Manufacturers name and plant location.

(b) Pole classification and type
(c) Dimension of the pole.
(d) Date of manufacture
(e) 28 days strength of concrete from which pole manufactured.
(f) Tested date.
(g) Increments of load (for both 1st and 2nd stage loading).

(h) Deflection at each increment of load.

(i) Permanent deflection after removal of 1st stage loading.
(j) Record of all cracking that takes place on a plan and elevations of the pole.
(k) Load at failure.
(l) Nature of failure.
(m) Color photographs along the axis of the pole at design working and ultimate loads plus
photographs of the failure zone on the pole.
The pole shall be considered acceptable if:
(a) No visible cracking occurs up to 125% of the design-working load in any of the poles
tested. Cracking should be checked by magnifying glass as approved by Engineer.
(b) Permanent deflection of the tip of the pole, after the 1st stage test loading is removed, does
not exceed 1mm per meter of the pole.
(c) The average failure load of the 3(three) poles tested equals or exceeds the ultimate design
load and the failure load of any single pole is not less than 0.90 times the ultimate design
load.
3.16.13.6 Proof Test
These shall be carried out on poles selected at random by the Engineer/Purchaser at the
following rate:
Lot Size No. of Poles to be selected for tests.
Up to 500 Nos. 5 Nos.

501 to 1000 Nos. 8 Nos.
1001 to 2000 Nos. 13 Nos.
2001 to 3000 Nos. 18 Nos.
3001 and above nos. 20 Nos.
In proof test at least one pole should be distracted by loading amount the poles tested by
125% design loading as per 1st and 2nd stage loading of type test. The test load shall be applied
in the same increments as the type test 1st stage loading but only up to 125% of the design-
working load.
The poles will be considered acceptable if the deflection at each load increment and
permanent deflection upon removal of load does not exceed by more than 15% the average of
the acceptable tests of the corresponding values for 1st Stage loading of the type tests. In
addition, no visible cracking shall occur.
The poles will be considered acceptable if the deflection at each load increment and the
permanent deflection upon removal of load does not exceed by more than 15% the average of
the acceptable tests of the corresponding values for 1st stage loading of the Type tests the pole
withstands at 250% working load without any type of failure.
3.16.14 Failure to satisfy Acceptable Criteria
In the event that a pole does not satisfy any of the above acceptable criteria are not satisfied
then at the discretion of the Engineer, any poles manufactured in the same manner as those
that have failed the acceptance test may be rejected.

3.16.15 Quality Assurance
The supplier/manufacturer shall submit with the bid an outline of the quality assurance
practices that will be applied to all aspects of the pole manufacturing process.
Within one month of receipt of a letter of intent for supply of poles under this specification
the supplier/manufacturer shall submit a detailed Quality Assurance Manual which conforms
generally to the requirements of BS 5757: 1979 or equivalent standards. Approval to a
proceeds with this Quality Assurance Manual has been received an approved by the
Engineer/Purchaser. Delays to the contract completion due to non-compliance with this
specification requirement will be the supplier/manufacturers responsibility.
Major features of the Quality Assurance scheme practiced by the supplier/manufacturer and
detailed in this Quality Assurance Manual shall be:
a) The Supplier/Manufacturer has defined all staff responsibilities and the Quality
Assurance System operating within the Organization for the Purpose of ensuring adequate
quality of the end product.
b) The Supplier/Manufacturer has a senior staff with the authority to resolve matters of
Quality to the satisfaction of the engineer.
c) The Supplier/Manufacturer has adequate facilities under the control of properly trained
staff to perform the quality control duties.
d) All production operations and test function are properly documented and available to any
relevant member of the Supplier/Manufacturers workforce.
e) A detailed inspection test plan has been prepared for the whole manufacturing operation.
f) Regular and systematic program of testing are carried out for all incoming raw materials.
g) Regular calibration checks are carried out on all measuring equipment used in the
manufacturing operations.
h) That statistical analysis is carried out regularly on appropriate test results to confirm that
all procedures are performing within the specified tolerance.
i) That adequate procedures are planned for corrective action in the event that quality
checks show that performance is not satisfactory.
j) That all checking activities, test results etc. are recorded on appropriate standardization
forms and these are verified, certified, recorded and filled is a systematic manner.
Claims for payment are to be accompanied by the quality assurance records for the same
production period. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the quality assurance records are
incomplete or indicate that the poles produced during the production period may not conform
with the specification then proof testing of the poles in accordance with clauses and shall be
carried out.
3.17 Technical Specification for Galvanized Steel Poles

3.17.1 General
This specification includes the design, manufacture, testing and supply of steel poles. The
poles shall be of the following types:
a) Uniformly tapered circular/polygonal cross section, in one piece, or

b) Telescopic, Uniformly tapered circular/polygonal cross-section, in more than one section.
The poles shall have maximum 4 sections.
For all the above types of poles no welding is allowed after galvanization.

The bidder shall submit the offer with materials required which shall meet the standard and
specification as specified. The bidder shall submit all the technical data as required in the
technical data schedule for each type of pole.
All information including design calculation, drawings, catalogues, materials standard,

welding procedure and standard, the bidder shall submit fabrication and erection procedure
along with the bid.
3.17.2 Standards
The equipment specified herein shall conform to the latest version of the appropriate
recognized international standards. In particular:
BS 729 : 1971 Hot dip galvanized coating on iron and steel articles or equivalent.
BS 4190 : 1967 Isometric hexagonal Bolts, Screws and Nuts.
BS 4360 Specification for weld able Structural Steel
BS 4870 Specification for approval testing of welding procedures.
BS 5649 : 1982 Part 4 Recommendations for surface protection of Metal
Lighting columns.
BS 5750 : 1997 Quality System
BS 6323 Part 1 to 8 for steel tubes.
The Engineers of DESCO will inspect the manufactured item at the manufacturers plant.
Test shall be performed in accordance with the relevant standards unless otherwise specified.
The following definitions and abbreviations apply to this specification.
3.17.4.1 Definitions:
i) Failure Inability of the pole when under test to support further load
or when deformation or buckling of the pole renders it
unserviceable.
ii) Longitudinal The horizontal direction parallels to the run of the direction
of the conductors.
iii) Transverse The horizontal direction at right angles to the run of direction
of the conductors.
iv) Ultimate The strength at which the pole will not accept any further
Applied force or when deformation or buckling or the pole
renders at unserviceable.

v) Pole Type :
a) Telescopic Assembled from a series of manufactured tapered sections,

which are fitted together, and then the total assembly is
axially loaded to force the tapered units together thus
proving friction connections between sections. The bidder
shall have mentioned the number of section for each type of
pole.
The taper shall be uniform throughout the length of the pole.

However the taper ratio for all the sections shall be same.
Assembly shall be by means of a simple slip joints without
the use of bolts, site welding or other jointing device at time
of erection. No circumferential joints are allowed.
Jointing shall be designed for a minimum lap of 1.5 times the

largest inside diameter of the female section with allowances
for fabrication tolerance.
b) Single piece taper pole Manufactured from circular/polygonal cross section in one
piece. The taper shall be uniformed throughout the length of
the pole. No. Circumferential joint is allowed.
3.17.4.2 Abbreviations
BS : British Standard.
IEC : International Electro-technical Commission.
Mpa : Mega Pascal = 1 N/sq. mm
3.17.5 Material and Manufactures
3.17.5.1 General
All materials shall be new and conform to the relevant standard refereed to this specification.
3.17.5.2 Materials
The minimum yield strength of the materials of pole shall be 280 N/sq. mm as per BS 4360.
3.17.5.3 Manufacture
All welding of the poles shall be carried out at the manufacturers plant and before
galvanization. No site will be permitted. Welding shall be carried out in accordance with the
procedures of an international standard approval by the Engineers of DESCO and this
procedure shall be tested in accordance with BS 4870 or equivalent standard. Welds parallel
to the longitudinal axis of the poles shall be fillet welds or full penetration but welds with
backing plates. All welds shall be capable of withstanding, with out failure of cracking, the
stresses in a pole when subject to its ultimate design loads.
3.17.5.4 Dimensional Tolerances
i) The tolerance on thickness : -0% to +10% on each sheet

ii) Outside Diameter : -0% to +2%
iii) Length of Sections : +/-40mm

iv) Telescopic poles : After assembly telescopic poles shall not exceed of
their stated length by +/- 75mm for 10m poles and
+/- 100 mm for 12m poles.
v) Straightness : Straightness shall not exceed 1/300 of their height.

vi) Thickness The minimum thickness of the material for bottom
section shall be 3mm.
vii) Taper/Slope of Poles : The side taper of the pole shall between 15mm to
25mm per meter length.
The design of pole shall be on the basis of minimum values considering tolerance.
3.17.5.5 Assembly of Telescopic Pole
Each pole shall be assembled in the factory and prior to assembly all seam welds on joint
mating surfaces shall be ground flush. All right spots in the galvanizing on mating surface
shall be ground and or fired flat and if the galvanizing is damaged it shall be repaired. During
the application of the compressive load to force the sections together, the joints shall be
agitated by striking them with timber or rubber mallets or by any other method as approved
by the Engineer. The coating of galvanization shall not be damaged by this method of
assembly.
3.17.5.6 Corrosion Protection
All poles internally and externally are to be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with BS 729:
1971 or equivalent standard or latest revision thereof.
After galvanization of poles the external surface of all poles below ground level and 500mm
above ground level shall be painted as follows:
a) A clean brush and solvent degrease, then one coat of phosphoric acid based etch primer
internally and externally followed by,
b) One coat airless spray of coal tar pitch epoxy paint for a dry film thickness of 1 x 100
microns on the inner surface of poles.
c) Two successive coat airless spray of coal tar pitch epoxy paint for a dry film thickness of
2 x 100 microns on the outer surface of poles.
Any bid not making provision for painting as above shall be rejected.
Any galvanized surface of the pole damaged after delivery and within the warranty period
shall be scrapped back to a firm base and two full thickness and coats of Zinc rich primer
applied to the damage to the galvanizing is extensive then that pole shall be removed from site
and re-galvanized.
3.17.5.7 Marking of Pole:
The poles shall have an identification mark with indelible paint on the pole at a position
approximately 3.5 meters from the but end which is clearly and indelibly marked with:
a) Date of manufacture
b) Identification mark
c) Length of pole in meters and its design working load, as defined in this specification.

For example a 12-meter pole with a 600 daN working load shall be marked 12m/600 daN.
The pole shall also be marked with a permanent horizontal line at a point 1/6th of the pole
height from the butt end. In case of sectional telescopic pole, all male sections shall be
marked with permanent horizontal line at the respective overlapping length from the top.
3.17.5.8 Earthing Lugs, Base Plate and Pole cap
Each pole shall be provided with Earthing lugs at 300mm below ground level, Base plate and
Pole cap. The materials of the Base plate and Pole Cap shall be galvanized steel and minimum
thickness of pole cap shall be 3mm. The base plate shall have proper fixing arrangements for
easy fixing at site. The size of the Base plate for 10m and 12m pole shall be 450mm x 450x
4.5mm and 550mm x 550mm x 4.5mm respectively.
3.17.6 Pole Length, Shape and design loading
3.17.6.1 General
Included in the bid document schedules detailing the total number of each class of pole to be
supplied under this contract and the required numbers that are to be delivered to the locations
nominated in the schedule.
3.17.6.2 Pole Length and Shape
The standard overall length of poles manufactured under this contract shall be of 12 Meters.
The plantation depth of each pole shall be 1/6th of the overall length of that pole. The Bider
shall submit a detailed description of the methods of pole manufacture and detailed
calculations for all aspects of design of the poles.
3.17.6.3 Design Loading
The standard design working loads in the transverse direction shall be as follows:
Total Length Design load applied 300mm Design vertical load

bellow pole top
12m Poles 500 daN 300 daN
15m Poles 600 daN 400 daN
3.17.6.4 Wind pressure
Following wind pressure have to be considered in addition to the design load by the
manufacturer,
Wind Pressure on Round surface 61kg/sq.m

Wind Pressure on Flat surface 96 kg/sq.m
Wind pressure on polygonal surface 87 kg/sq.m
3.17.6.5 Design of Poles
Each class of poles shall be design to have adequate strength under the ultimate design loads.
The pole shall be designed with a factor of safety of 2.0 on yield strength. The detailed

combined stress calculations of each type of poles shall be submitted with the bid otherwise
the bid shall be rejected.
3.17.7 Testing of Poles
3.17.7.1 General
The supplier/manufacturer shall make all arrangements and provide all facilities for pole
testing detailed herein. Each class of pole shall be subject to 2(two) types of tests:
a) Type Test (Destruction Tests)
These shall be carried out to prove that each class of poles satisfies all the design
requirements set out in these specifications.
Manufacture of poles to be supplied under this contract shall not commence until designs
have been successfully type tested and the Engineer has certified the same.
b) Proof Tests (Acceptance Tests)
These shall be carried out periodically to check the consistency of the standard of
manufacture. Poles, who successfully pass proof tests, may form part of the contract for
supply.
3.17.7.2 Testing Arrangement
Pole shall be tested in the horizontal position in a testing arrangement similar to that shown
on drawing no. 1. The testing arrangement shall be provided with sufficient support to ensure
that bending moments developed by the self-weight of the pole are minimum. These supports
shall be detailed to give on horizontal resistance to the applied loads. The accuracy of all
loads and deflection measuring equipment shall be 2%.
3.17.7.3 Observation of testing
All tests shall be carried out by the supplier/manufacturer and the Engineers of DESCO shall
witness all aspects.
The supplier/manufacturer shall give the Purchaser/Engineer a minimum of 15(fifteen) days

notice before commencing any tests.
The costs of all the above testing shall be included in the bid price. This shall include any
additional testing instructed to be carried out by the Engineer/Purchaser to prove that a class
of pole satisfied all design requirements.
3.17.7.5 Type Test
These shall be carried out before full scale manufacture of a class of pole commences; after
any changes are made to the approved design of a class of pole; or at any time the
Engineer/Purchaser considers necessary modification to confirm that any class of poles still
satisfy the design requirements.

A sample considering of 3(three) poles from each class of poles, similar in all essential
features or design and construction to those purchased, shall be subject to the Type test and
must give evidence that the poles comply with the acceptance criteria of this specification.
The test arrangement shall be similar to that in drawing no. 1. The test shall be carried out in 2
stages.
a) 1st Stage
The load shall be gradually and uniformly applied in increments of 20% of the Ultimate
design load up to 120% of the design working load. At each increment of load the deflection
of the pole tip shall be measured. The 120% loading shall be maintained for a 5(five) minutes.
The load shall then be gradually reduced to zero and the amount of permanent deflection of
the pole tip recorded.
b) 2nd Stage
The test load shall gradually re-applied up to the working load and the deflection recorded.
The load shall then be increased in 20% increments until failure occurs. At each load
increment the load and deflection shall be recorded.
The following particulars shall be recorded for each test made:
(a) Manufacturers name and plant location.

(b) Pole classification and type.
(c) Dimension of the pole.
(d) Date of manufacture.
(e) Tested date.
(f) Increments of load (for both 1st and 2nd stage loading).
(g) Deflection at each increment of load.
(h) Permanent deflection after removal of 1st stage loading.
(i) Load at failure.
(j) Nature of failure.
(k) Color photographs along the axis of the pole at design working and ultimate loads plus
(l) Color photographs along the axis of the pole at design working and ultimate loads plus
The pole shall be considered acceptable if:
Permanent deflection of the tip of the pole, after the 1st stage test loading is removed, does not
exceed 3mm and 4mm per meter of pole length for 10m and 12m poles respectively.
The average failure load of the 3(three) poles tested equals or exceeds the ultimate design
load and the failure load of any single pole is not less than 0.90 times the ultimate design
load.
3.17.7.6 Proof Test
These shall be carried out on poles selected at random by the Engineer/Purchaser at the
following rate:
Lot Size No. of Poles to be selected for tests.
Up to 500 Nos. 5 Nos.

501 to 1000 Nos. 8 Nos.

1001 to 2000 Nos. 13 Nos.
2001 to 3000 Nos. 18 Nos.
3001 and above Nos. 20 Nos.
1st Stage Test
This test shall be carried out in the same manner as in the 1st stage test of the type test.
2nd stage Test.
The test load shall be gradually reapplied up to the working load and the deflection recorded.
The load shall than be increased in 20% increments up to 200% working load.
The poles will be considered acceptable if the deflection at each load increment and the
permanent deflection upon removal of load do not exceed by more than 15% the average of
the acceptable tests of the corresponding values for 1st stage loading of the Type Tests the
pole withstands at 200% working load without any type of failure.
3.17.8 Failure to satisfy Acceptable Criteria
In the event that a pole does not satisfy any of the above acceptable criteria for Proof Tests,
then one more pole shall be tested for every one that does not meet these acceptance criteria.
If any of these additional poles fail to satisfy the acceptance criteria then consultations shall
be held with the Engineer and if so instructed the supplier/manufacturer shall modify the pole
design or construction procedure to increase the strength of the pole.
In the event that any of the above acceptance criteria are not satisfied, then at the discretion of
the Engineer, any poles manufactured in the same manner as those that have failed the
acceptance test be rejected.
Within one month or receipt of a letter of intent for supply of poles under this specification
generally with the requirements of BS 5757: 1979 or equivalent standards. Approval to a
Assurance System operating within the Organization for the purpose of ensuring adequate
quality of the end product.
c) The Supplier/Manufacturer has adequate facilities under the control of properly trained
staff to perform the quality control duties.

i) That adequate procedures are planned for corrective action in the event that quality
checks show that performance is not satisfactory.
incomplete or indicate that the poles produced during the production period may not conform
with the specification then proof testing of the poles as per relevant standards unless
otherwise specified.
3.18 Technical Specifications for pole fittings and Line Hardware
3.18.1 General
This specification includes the design, manufacture, and testing of pole fittings suitable for
bided poles.
3.18.2 Standards
The equipment specified herein shall conform to the latest version of the appropriate
recognized international standards.
BS 729 : 1971 Hot dip galvanized coating on iron and steel articles or equivalent.
BS 4190 : 1967 Isometric Hexagonal Bolts, Screws and Nuts.

BS 4360 Specification for weld able Structural Steel
BS 4870 Specification for approval testing of welding procedures.
The Engineers of DESCO may inspect the manufactured item at the manufacturers plant.
Test shall be performed in accordance with the relevant standards unless otherwise stated.
Production item not meeting the approved specification will be rejected.
The following definitions and abbreviations apply to the specification.
3.18.4.1 Definitions:

i) Failure. : Inability of the pole fittings when under test to support further load or
when deformation or buckling of the pole renders it unserviceable.
ii) Longitudinal : The horizontal direction parallel to the run of the direction of the
conductors.
iii) Transverse: The horizontal direction at right angles to the run of direction of the
conductors.
iv) Ultimate: The strength at which the pole fittings will not accept any further
applied force or when deformation or buckling or the pole renders at
unserviceable.
3.18.4.2 Abbreviations
BS : British Standard.
IEC : International Electro-technical Commission
Mpa : Maga Pascal = 1 N/sq. mm.
3.18.5 Material and Manufactures.
3.18.5.1 Materials for cross Arms, Accessories and Pole fittings.
All materials shall be new and conform to the relevant standard referred in these
specifications. All types of pole fittings and accessories shall be manufactured from material
having minimum yield strength of 245 N/sq. mm as per BS 4360.
3.18.5.2 Corrosion Protection and Galvanizing:
a) All pole fittings, including Nuts and Bolts, shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with
BS 729 : 1971.
b) The zinc coating shall be smooth, clean and of uniform thickness and free from defects.
All drilling, punching, cutting, shaping and welding of parts shall be completed and all
burns shall be removed before the galvanizing process is applied.
c) Any galvanized surface of the pole fittings damaged after delivery and within the
warranty period shall be scrapped back to a firm base and two full thickness and coats of
Zinc rich primer applied to the damage to the galvanizing is extensive then that pole
fittings shall be removed from site and re-galvanized.
3.18.5.3 Marking of Pole Fittings
All pole fittings shall have the identification code number as shown in the drawings directly
marked with indelible paint after galvanizing.
3.18.5.4 Design of Pole Fittings.
The fittings shall be so designed that they fit with the bidder poles.
3.18.5.5 Dimensional Tolerances.
The permitted variation from stated dimension shall be as follows except mentioned
otherwise.

Material sizes : +/-1mm.

Thickness tolerance : +/-0.6mm.
3.18.5.6 Manufacture
Pole fittings shall be manufactured to the details on the attached drawings and schedules and
from the materials specified in this section.
All welding of the pole fittings shall be carried out in accordance with the procedures of an
international standard approved by the Engineer and these procedures shall be tested in
accordance with AWS standards at the manufacturers plant and before galvanization. All
welding shall be continuous and shall be of a size and type capable of developing the full
strength of the parent metal without permanent distortion in the finished fittings. No site will
be permitted.
3.18.6 Line Hardware:
3.18.6.1 General:
Preformed fittings shall be manufactured for Conductor ties, Dead Ends and Guy.
The preformed fittings shall be compatible for:
ACSR Merlin, ACSR DOG and ACSR Rabbit, AAC Insulated WASP, ANT Conductors
Galvanized Steel Guy wire of size 9.5mm overall diameter.
The conductor shall ensure that all preformed fittings are compatible for installation with the
insulators and thimbles required for correct construction of lines.
Preformed fittings shall be the correct size for the conductor to which it is to be fitted and
shall be of adequate strength for the purpose for which it is intended. The preformed fittings
shall be such that it is unable to slip whilst in service.
3.18.6.2 Preformed Terminations for Line and Guy Wire:
Preformed terminations shall be made of Galvanized steel wire, right hand pitch shall be
supplied for termination of the following conductor and wires:
Nominal Size ( Sq.mm) Material to be terminated
55 Galvanized Steel Guy wire (bare)

50 AAC ANT, PVC Insulated
Conductor.
100 AAC WASP, PVC Insulated
Conductor.
Holding strength of the above preformed fittings shall be 95% of the Conductor UTS and
shall complied with the relevant standard for design and manufacture. Test shall be under
taken during delivery to ensure that the required holding strength has been developed.

3.18.6.3 Galvanized Steel Guy Wire:
Guy wire shall conform to the requirement of BS 183: 1971 or other approved equivalent
standard. Galvanized Steel Guy wire shall be 7/3.15mm, 48KN. The grade of guy wire shall
be 700.
3.18.6.4 Earthing Materials for poles and Transformers:
Each Steel or Pre-stressed concrete pole shall be earthed in accordance with the attached
drawing.
Earth rods shall be of hot dip galvanized mild steel, and shall be fully extensible and supplied
with 25 sq.mm stranded, PVC covered, annealed copper conductors suitable for installation
both overhead and under ground. The voltage rating of this conductor shall be
600/1000Vstandard and specification shall be as per latest version of international standard.
Within one month of receipt of a letter of intent for supply of poles under this specification
generally to the requirements of BS 5757: 1979 or equivalent standards. Approval to a
Assurance System Operating within the Organization for the purpose of ensuring
adequate quality of the end product.
c) The supply/manufacturer has adequate facilities under the control of properly trained staff
to perform the quality control duties.
i) That adequate procedure is planned for corrective action in the event that quality checks
show that performance is not satisfactory.

incomplete or indicate that the pole fittings produced during the production period may not
conform to the specification then proof testing of the poles.
3.19 Other Requirements:
3.19.1 Schedule for Line Configuration
Item Description Units 12m Poles

No.
1. Normal Line Voltage Number and size of V 11000/400
Conductors.
11KV (Bare)
400V (PVC Insulated) Conductor heights above
ground level Design Span
2. i) Basic Span M
ii) Wind span M
iii) Weight Span M
3. Working Wind load on Pole Insulator and N/sq.m
Conductors (full projected Area)
4. Minimum permissible tube wall thickness mm
5. Maximum line Deviation:
i) Without Stay
ii) With 2 or 4 stay
6. Pole factor of safety based on Yield Stress of N/sq.mm
Materials (Elastic limits)
7. Bending load under MWT condition
8. Minimum Yield stress of steel to be used
9. Minimum factor of safety of Stay based on
10. Guaranteed breaking strength
3.18.10 Approval of Drawings:
The successful Bidder shall submit five (5) sets of Drawings and other technical information
3.18.11 Packing:
The complete goods/materials are to be export-packed and properly protected for

shipment, rough transportation and storage. Specific care shall be taken for protection
in store and reference is made to the climatic condition prevailing in Bangladesh.
Each item shall be protected by wrapping of suitable gauge polyethylene and packed
in non-returnable wooden carat. It is mentioned here that no damage of wooden
cartoon shall be acceptable during transportation, handling, loading, un-loading,

carrying, storing. If damaged, it should be repair by the suppliers own arrangement

without extra charge from the Purchaser.
The supplier shall be responsible for damages due to inadequate packing. A packing
list showing the contents of each packing shall be enclosed in a waterproof envelope
secured to the outside of the packing case. A copy of the packing list shall also be
enclosed inside the package.
All packages imported are liable to be opened for Customs examination and packing
shall therefore be designed to facilitate opening and re-packing thereafter.
A red band (20 cm. wide) shall be painted all around each package. Each package
shall have the following information printed on it in bold letters:
- Name of supplier.
- Port of Loading.
- Contract Number.
- Measurements.
In addition, each package shall be clearly marked or stencilled in red on two sides. The
shipping mark be inscribed within a triangle marked as shown below:
DESCO
BANGLADESH
On the other two sides arrow marking with the wording THIS SIDE UP and FRAGILE
shall be clearly marked or stencilled to indicate the face of the package to be kept upward.
THIS SIDE UP FRAGILE
3.18.12 Inspection and Testing:
The Purchaser may appoint its own official(s) and/or a third party inspection agency as
Inspector (s) and they shall be entitled at all reasonable time during manufacture and/or pre-
delivery/pre-shipment to inspect and test the goods/materials in order to confirm the
specification, workmanship and performance at the manufacturer's premises.

The Purchaser through a Two- Member Team of its own may carry out Stage Inspection
during manufacturing of goods at the Manufacturing Plant(s). The team shall submit its report
to DESCO Management after visit.
The Supplier shall, after consulting the Purchaser, give the Purchaser reasonable notice in
writing of the date on and the place at which any material or equipment will be ready for
testing as provided in the contract and if the Purchaser does not attend at the place so named
on date, which the supplier has stated in his notice, the Supplier may proceed with the tests,
which shall be deemed to have been made in the Purchasers presence, and shall forthwith
forward to the Purchaser duly certified copies of Test Readings.
In case the Purchaser intends to attend the test, the Supplier shall be informed accordingly in
writing, so that the supplier can take action at their end.
The tests, as agreed upon by the Purchaser and the Supplier, shall be carried out as per
relevant IEC/BS Standard or equivalent.
As and when the Purchaser is satisfied that any materials/equipment shall have passed the
relevant tests, the Purchaser shall notify the Contractor in writing to the effect.
Should any inspected/tested goods fail to conform to the specification, the Purchaser shall
have the right to reject any of the items or complete batch if necessary. In that case the
Supplier shall have to replace the goods and to make good of them without any financial
involvement to the Purchaser.
Nothing in this clause shall in any way release the Supplier from any warranty or other
3.18.13 Costs related to inspection and testing:
Where the Supplier provides for tests on the premises of the Supplier or of any Manufacturer
of the Supplier, except where otherwise specified, shall provide free of charge such
assistance, labour, materials, electricity, fuel, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be
required and reasonably demanded to carry out such test.
by the Purchaser.
3.18.14 Post Landing Inspection (PLI):
Post Landing Inspection of delivered goods shall be done by a PLI Committee of DESCO
immediately after arrival of the goods at the designated store of DESCO. The program of such
inspection shall be intimated to the Supplier for presence of their Representative during the
PLI. The PLI Committee in its report shall mention the exact/assessed quantity of goods. The
Post Landing Inspection of goods shall generally cover the following, but not limited to it:
(i) Visual Inspection of Goods;

(i) Quantity of supplied Goods.


3.19.1 Technical Data Schedule for Spun Pre-Stressed Concrete (SPC) Pole (10Meter,
250 daN)
(to be filled up by the manufacturer, otherwise the bid will not be considered for evaluation)
Sl. Description of parameters Unit Manufacturers Particulars

No.
1 Schedule Item No.
2 Name and Address of the Manufacturer
3 Manufacturers Code No. (if any)
4 Type 10Meter, 250 daN
5 Overall Length of Specified Poles Meter
6 Depth of Plantation Meter
7 Taper Ratio mm/meter
8 Maximum outside diameter
a. Tom mm
b. Bottom mm
9 Thickness of casing mm
10 No. and Size of Pre-Stressing Wires no./mm
11 Straightness Ratio (deviation to length)
12 Weight of poles Kg
13 Factor of Safety (FOS) on poles %
maximum design load
14 Maximum line deviation without stay In degrees
Seal and Signature of the Bidder:

3.19.2 Technical Data Schedule for Spun Pre-Stressed Concrete (SPC) Pole
(12Meter, 300 daN)

No.
1 Schedule Item No.
a. Tom mm
b. Bottom mm
maximum design load

3.19.3 Technical Data Schedule for Spun Pre-Stressed Concrete (SPC) Pole 12Meter,
400 daN

No.
1 Schedule Item No.
a. Tom mm
b. Bottom mm
maximum design load

Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 10M, 300daN Steel Pole

(to be filled up by the manufacturer, otherwise the Bid will not be considered for evaluation)
Sl. No. Description of parameters Unit Manufacturers

Particulars
1 Schedule Item No.
7 Number of Sections Nos.
(If section poles offered)
8 Length of Section:
a. Bottom Section Meter
b. Lower Middle Section Meter
c. Upper Middle Section Meter
d. Top Section Meter
9 Outside Diameter (Top & Bottom)
a. Bottom Section mm/mm
b. Lower Middle Section mm/mm
c. Upper Middle Section mm/mm
d. Top Section mm/mm
10 Thickness of Steel
a. Bottom Section mm
b. Lower Middle Section mm
c. Upper Middle Section mm
d. Top Section mm
11 Minimum Tensile Strength of steel Kg/sq.mm
12 Minimum Yield strength of steel Kg/sq.mm
13 Method of jointing (where applicable)
14 Type of welding
16 Number of longitudinal joints Nos.
17 Thickness tolerance +/-mm
18 Size of base plate mmxmmxmm
19 Straightness ratio (deviation to length)
20 Depth of galvanized finish g/sq.mm
21 Depth of anti corrosion treatment:
a. Outside Micron
b. Inside Micron
22 Factor of Safety (FOS) on poles maximum %
design load

Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 12M, 350daN Steel Pole

Sl. No. Description of parameters Unit Manufacturers

Particulars
1 Schedule Item No.
d. Top Section mm
14 Type of welding
a. Outside Micron
b. Inside Micron
design load

Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 12M, 500 daN Steel Pole
Sl. Description of parameters Unit Manufacturers

No. Particulars
1 Schedule Item No.
d. Top Section mm
14 Type of welding
a. Outside Micron
b. Inside Micron
design load

3.19.4 Technical Data Schedule for Pole Fittings and Line Hardware
(to be filled up by the manufaturer, otherwise the bid will not be considered for evaluation)
Sl. No. Description of Parameters Manufacturers Particulars

A. MS Flat Bar (FB) and Angles for Pole
Fittings
01 Name and Address of Manufacturer
02 Name of the Materials FB/Angles
03 Tensile Strength (kg/sq.mm)
04 Yield Strength of Materials (kg/sq.mm)
05 Minimum galvanization thickness in Micron
B. MS Rod for Anchor Rod, Anchor Rod and
Nut Bolts
02 Name of the Materials
03 Tensile Strength (kg/sq.mm)
04 Yield Strength of Materials (kg/sq.mm)
05 Minimum galvanization thickness in Micron
C. PVC Insulated Earthing Wire
02 Name of the Materials
03 Thickness of Insulating Materials
04 No./diameter of strands
05 Weight/Km of Conductor
D. Side Lock Tie for ACSR Merlin
02 Length in mm
03 Holding Strength in kg.
04 Ultimate Tensile strength
05 Lay direction
06 Class of Galvanization
07 Weight of each 100 Pcs in Kg.
E. Side Lock Tie for ACSR DOG
02 Length in mm
05 Lay direction
F. Side Lock Tie for ACSR Rabbit
02 Length in mm
05 Lay direction
G. Galvanized Steel Guy Wire
02 Minimum failing load in KN
03 No./Diameter of strands
04 Lay direction

06 Weight/KM of Guy wire
H. Preformed Termination for Galvanized
Steel Guy Wire
02 Material
03 Length of Termination in mm
04 Holding Strength in Kg.
05 Lay direction
07 Weight/100 pcs. In Kg.
I. Preformed Termination for AAC WASP
Insulated Conductors
02 Material
05 Lay direction
J. Preformed Termination for AAC ANT
Insulated Conductor
02 Material
05 Lay direction
K. Preformed Armour Rod for ACSR DOG
Conductor
02 Material
03 Length of Armour Rod
04 No./Diameter of Armour Rod
05 Lay direction
06 Weight/100 set in Kg.
L. Preformed Armour Rod for ACSR Rabbit
Conductor
02 Material
03 Length of Armour Rod
04 No./Diameter of Armour Rod
05 Lay direction
06 Weight/100 set in Kg.
Seal and Signature of the bidder: .

4. DRAWINGS
For Poles:
Bidder shall provide appropriate drawings of their products to be offered in this Bid.
For Pole Fittings and Line Hardware:
Clamps and mountings shall be for round/polygonal shaped Steel and or SPC Poles. Fixing
arrangement of Pole Fittings shall be as per drawings included in Sec.-8. The
supplier/manufacturer shall submit all drawings of pole fittings to DESCO for approval
before manufacturing. For the purpose of this tender, the bidder shall consider clamp dia of
different items in the range shown in the following table. The diameter of clamps in between
the top clamp and bottom clamp shall be determined in consideration of the clamp positions
shown in the drawings. The exact diameter of different clamps shall be communicated to the
successful bidder after award of contract and accordingly manufacturer shall submit the
drawings for approval.
For Steel Poles:
Item No. Clamp fixing positionvaries Top dia of Bottom dia of

from: corresponding corresponding
Dia of Top Dia of bottom poles (mm) poles (mm)
Clamp (mm) clamp (mm)
Type-A, B, C 10015% 20015% 10015% 37515%
&F
Type-D, E & 15515% 25515% 15515% 43515%
G
Type-H to 10010% 13010% 10010% 32015%
Type-M
For SPC Poles:
Item No. Clamp fixing positionvaries Top dia of Bottom dia of

from: corresponding corresponding
Dia of Top Dia of bottom poles (mm) poles (mm)
Clamp (mm) clamp (mm)
Type-A, B, 20315% 26015% 20015% 36015%
C & F (4.5M)
Type-D, E & 22315% 28015% (4.5) 22015% 38015%
G
Type-H to 19315% 20815% (1.33) 19015% 32515%

Type-M

Lot-3 of Package-2
Supply and Delivery of Distribution Transformers and Ring Main Unit
(RMU)

Contents
1. List of Goods and Related Services.......................................................................................6-94
2. Delivery and Completion Schedule.......................................................................................6-95
3. Technical Specifications........................................................................................................6-96
4. Drawings.............................................................................................................................6-125


Lot Name: Supply and Delivery of Distribution Transformers and Ring Main Unit
(RMU)
Item No. Name of Goods or Description Unit of Quantity
Related Services Measurement
01 Supply & Delivery of: 11/0.415KV, 3-phase, 50Hz, 200KVA Nos. 1500
Distribution Transformer
02 Supply & Delivery of: 11/0.240KV, 25KVA, 50Hz, 1-phase Nos. 300
03 Supply & Delivery of: 11 kV Ring Main Unit (R.M.U) Nos. 150

The delivery period shall start as of 21 days after the issuance of qualified commitment (QC) on
Letter of Credit from Asian Development Bank (ADB).
The delivery shall be completed within 180 (one hundred and eighty) days counting from 21 days
after issuance of QC in the Port of Entry for Goods offered from outside the Purchasers Country and
Ex-Works for Goods offered from within the Purchasers country.
the bid shall be evaluated in the manner and to the extent specified in Section III, Evaluation and
Qualification Criteria.
Required
Item Qty. Location Arrival Date
No. of Goods or
Completion
Date for
Related
Services
Port of Entry
for Goods
offered from
270 days
outside the
counting
Purchasers
from 21
Country and
days after
Ex-Works for
issuance of
Goods offered
CL.
from within the
Purchasers
country.
01 11/0.415KV, 3-phase, 1500
50Hz, 200KVA Nos.
02 11/0.240KV, 25KVA, 300
50Hz, 1-phase Distribution Nos.
Transformer
03 11 kV Ring Main Unit 150
(R.M.U) Nos.
Seal & Signature of the Bidder:.

Table of Contents
3.1 General 6-93

3.2 Reference and Standards 6-93
3.4 Technical Specification of 11/0.415 KV, 200 KVA, 3-Phase, Distribution Transformer
3.4.1 Specification 6-94
3.4.2 Features & Accessories 6-95
3.4.3 Information Required 6-96
3.5 Technical Specification of 11/0.24 KV, 25 KVA, 3-Phase, Distribution Transformer
3.5.1 Specification 6-101
3.5.2 Features & Accessories 6-102
3.5.3 Information required 6-102
3.6 Technical Specification of 12 KV SF6 Insulated Compact Ring Main Unit (RMU)
3.6.1 General Technical Requirements 6-103
3.6.2 Service conditions 6-103
3.6.3 System Parameters 6-103
3.6.4 General Stipulations regarding the design and development 6-104
of switchgear
3.6.5 Compact Switchgear bushings and Cable terminations 6-106
3.6.6 Padlocking facilities 6-106
3.6.7 Voltage Indicator lamps and phase comparators 6-106
3.6.8 Safety of People 6-106
3.6.9 Operating Lever 6-106
3.6.10 Front Plate 6-107
3.6.11 Test 6-107
3.6.12 Manufacturing Facilities 6-107
3.7 Particular Requirements

3.7.1 Loss Capitalization 6-108
3.7.2 Acceptability on account of losses 6-108

3.7.3 Approval of Drawings 6-109

3.7.4 Packing 6-109
3.7.6 Post landing Inspection (PLI) 6-110
3.8.1 11/0.415 KV, 3-Ph, 200 KVA Distribution Transformer 6-113
3.8.2 11/0.240 KV, 1-Ph, 25 KVA Distribution Transformer 6-116
3.8.3 12 KV SF6 Insulated Ring Main Unit (RMU) 6-118

3.1 General
Where a Manufacturers Standard or a national Standard equal to or better than the

appropriate specified standard has been issued and is acceptable to the Purchaser, any material
or goods supplied shall be manufactured, installed and tested in accordance with the latest
revision of the relevant standard unless otherwise specified.
Where any Standard referred to in this Specification has been superseded by a new standard
prior to the date of the letter or invitation to bid, the reference shall be deemed to be to such
superseding standard.
Deviations from this Specification or standards referred to above shall be given in the bid and
shall be accepted by the Purchaser before contract placement.
The works shall be designed to ensure continuity of service under all working condition at the
site as the first consideration and to facilitate inspection, maintenance and repairs. All
electrical components shall be adequately rated for their most onerous duty and the specified
ambient temperature.
All goods supplied shall be designed and be of such quality as to require the minimum of
maintenance during service. No welding, plugging or filling of defective parts shall be carried
out without the prior sanction in writing of the Purchaser. Corresponding parts of similar
goods/material, and goods/material liable to renewal, shall be fully interchangeable
3.2 References and Standards
The recommendations and tests specified in the standards shall be adhered to. Equivalent
standards established or approved in the country of manufacture may be used subject to the
Purchasers approval.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to demonstrate to the Purchaser that any
proposed National Standard is equal to or superior to the equivalent IEC or BS. All costs for
this demonstration are deemed included in the Contractors Bid Prices.
3.2.1 British Standards
BS 159 Specifications for HV bus bars and bus bar connections

BS 1977 Specifications for high conductivity copper tubes for electrical purposes
BS 2898 Specifications for wrought aluminium for electrical purposes. Strip with drawn or
rolled edges.
BS 3938 Specification for current transformers.

BS 5253 Specifications for AC disconnectors and earthing switches.
BS 6651 Lightning Protection
BS 7354 Code of practice for design of HV open terminal stations.
3.2.2 IEC Standards
IEC 60056 HV AC circuit breakers.

IEC 60694 Common clauses for high-voltage switchgear and control gear
standards
IEC 60298 A.C. metal-enclosed switchgear and controlgear for rated voltages
above 1KV and up to and including 52 KV.

IEC 60376 Specification and acceptance of new sulphur hexafluoride

IEC 60480 Guide to checking of sulphur hexafluoride taken from electrical
equipment.
IEC 60060 High Voltage test techniques.
IEC 60071 Insulation Co-ordination
IEC 60099 Surge arresters
IEC 60129 AC disconnectors (isolators) and earthing switches.
IEC 60071 Insulation Co-ordination
IEC 60099 Surge arresters
IEC 60185 Current transformers.
IEC 60186 Voltage transformers.
IEC 60233 Tests on hollow insulators for use in electrical equipment.
IEC 60265 HV switches.
IEC 60273 Characteristics of indoor and outdoor post insulators for systems with
nominal voltages greater than 1000V.
IEC 60801 Monitoring and control
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection procured by enclosures (IP code)
IS 13118/ BS 5311 HV AC circuit breakers
IS/BS 5463 High Voltage switches
IS/BS 5227 Metal enclosed AC switchgear
The offered Distribution Transformers shall be suitable for working in the climate conditions
of Bangladesh as described below:

Humidity : 98%
3.4 Technical Specification of 11/0.415KV, 200KVA, 3-Phase, Distribution

Transformer
3.4.1 Specification:
1. Installation Outdoor, Tropical, High Rainfall & Humidity

2. Type Core
3. Coolant Mineral oil
4. Method of Cooling ONAN
5. Phases 3 (Three)
6. Frequency 50 Hz
7. Winding Two winding of high conductivity copper

8. KVA Rating 200 KVA

9. Rated Voltage at no-load 11/0.415 KV
10. Vector Group Dyn11
11. Percentage Impedance at 75 C,% 4%
12. No Load Loss 435 Watts
13. Load loss at 75 C 2820 Watts
Maximum Temperature Rise at full load a) 65C for winding measured by Resistance
Over 40 C ambient temperature with tap Method.
14.
changer in principal position. b) 60C for Top Oil measured by
thermometer Method.
3.4.2 Major Components
3.4.2.1 HT Winding
Nominal rated voltage :

11 KV
Maximum system voltage :
12 KV
Basic insulation level (minimum) :
75 KV
Tap Changer :
+1x2.5%, O, -3x2.5% of rated kv & all fully rated
capacity. Tap Changer shall be off load type, manually
operated from an external five-position mechanism.
Inter phase connection : Delta
Bushings : Porcelain, outdoors type with arcing horns of standard
mounted on top of tank, Quantity-3 Nos.
Power frequency withstand voltage for : 28 KV
one minute
3.4.2.2 LT Winding
Nominal rated voltage :

415 Volts
Highest system voltage :
457 Volts
Inter phase connection :
Y (Wye) with neutral brought out.
Bushings :
Porcelain, outdoors type, mounted on top of tank,
(Longest side) Quantity-4 Nos.
Power frequency withstand voltage for : 2.5 KV
one minute
TRANSPORMER OIL
Application : Insulating mineral oil for Transformer. It will be free
from PCB (Poly Chlorinated Biphenyl)
Grade of oil : Class-1
a) Physical Properties
Appearance : Liquid and free from suspended matter or sediment
Density at 20C : 0.895 g/cm3 (Maxm)
Flash point (Closed cup) : 140oC (Minm.)
Kinematics Viscosity at -15C : 800 cSt. (Maxm)
Kinematics Viscosity at 20C : 40 cSt. (Maxm)
Pour point : -30o C (Maxm)

b) Electrical Properties
Dielectric Strength at 50 Hz (with New untreated oil, shall go through filtration treatment
2.5 mm standard gap and 40 mm : before the oils are introduced into the apparatus or
standard depth) equipment. The break down voltage of this oil shall be
more than 50 KV.
Loss tangent/Delectric dissipation : 0.005 (Maxm)
factor at temp. 90 C, stress
500V/mm
to 1000 V/mm and frequency 40
Hz to 62 Hz
c) Chemical Properties
Neutralization value : IEC 62021-1
Neutralization value after : IEC 61125C
oxidation
Total sludge after oxidation : IEC 61125C
PCB Content : Free from PCB (Poly Chlorinated Biphenyl)
d) Standards : Performance and testing of oil shall comply with the
latest revision of the relevant standards BS 148: 1972,
IEC-60296 or latest revision there on.
3.4.3 Features & Accessories
a) All bolts and nuts connected with transformer tank, conservator, radiator etc. Shall be
of non-ferrous metal. If it is ferrous metal, it shall be hot dip galvanized as per
standard ASTM A90/BS EN ISO 1461: 1999.
b) Lugs for lifting & towing complete unit.
c) Facilities for lifting core & coil assembly.
d) Base designed for platform mounting on poles.
e) First filling of new oil shall comply with the latest revision of IEC-60296 standard or
other equivalent standards.
f) Each H.T. bushing shall have bolted type bimetallic connector suitable for
accommodating ACSR conductor having Dia, range from 9mm to 14.5mm.
g) Each L.T. bushing shall have bolted type bimetallic connector copper cable/AAC of area
range 2x95mm2 to 2x120mm2.
h) The L.T bushing shall be installed on the side/top lengthwise of the transformer body.
However radiator shall be avoided on this side on the body.
i) Dial thermometer for oil temperature mounted on L.T. side of the tank.
j) Earthing terminals at the bottom corners of Tank.
k) Name plate with transformer rating & winding diagram made of stainless steel shall have
engraved letters filled with black enamel.
l) The tank & radiator or flanged radiator shall be painted with two coats of gray finishing
paint on suitable prime coats.
m) Transformer capacity with Sl. No. should be marked with emboss/ engrave on the transformer
tank adjacent to name plate easily visible from ground.

For conservator type:

a) Transformer tank completes with covers, necessary openings & gaskets.
b) Complete oil preservation system consisting of an oil conservator with shut-off valve oil level
gauge. The system shall have valve for filter press inlet & oil drain. The oil sampling valve &
dehydrating breather shall be provided.
3.4.4 Transformer Construction

11.1 General
The transformers shall be double-wound; oil immersed naturally air cooled and conventional
type with tank breathers.
The core shall be high-grade cold rolled electrical sheet steel or amorphous. The primary and
secondary windings shall be constructed form high conductivity copper. All turns of windings
shall be adequately supported to prevent movement. In case where turns are spaced out,
suitable inter-turn packing shall be provided.
No material, which can be deleteriously affected by the action of oil under the operating
conditions of the transformers, shall be used in the transformers or leads or bushings.
Construction features shall permit local repairs to be easily carried out in the event of
equipment failure.
3.4.5 TRANSFORMER TANK
The transformer tank shall be fabricated from steel and be of robust construction: all welds
shall be made by the electrical arc welding process and the slag carefully removed after each
run.
With the exception of radiator elements, all external joints shall be welded property. Cooling
radiators shall be of robust and simple construction. Complicated shapes shall not be
acceptable, and horizontal stiffeners on tanks should be avoided. The bearing surface of the
tank to which bushings are clamped shall be substantially flat.
All matching faces or joints to be made oil tight shall be finished with a smooth surface to
ensure that the gasketing material will make a satisfactory joint material will make a
satisfactory joint.
Flanges and covers of tanks shall be of sufficient thickness to prevent any depression
occurring, which would retain water around the bolts. Bolts shall be spaced at sufficiently
close intervals to avoid bucking of either flangs or covers and provide reasonably uniform
compression of the gasket.
Each transformer shall be provided with a minimum of two closed lifting lugs. The minimum
diameter of the hole or width of the slot shall be 25 mm. The two lifting lugs shall be located
150 mm on each side of the centre line of the longest sides of the transformers.
All Transformers shall be suitable for outdoor mounting on pole platforms and shall have four
mounting lugs with 19 mm dia holes suitable for bolting the transformer to the platform. The
two lifting lugs shall be located 150 mm on each side of the centre line of the longest sides of
the transformers.
The fitting of oil conservators is not mandatory, but the Bidder must state in the bid whether
the Bidders design includes oil conservators. Transformers shall be fitted with oil draining and

oil filling gate valves, and a breather. The breather shall consist of a looped pipe fitted to the
top of the transformer.
The LT Bushings shall be mounted on one of the longest side of the transformer tank. An oil
level sight glass shall be fitted and marked with minimum & maximum oil level mark at
ambient temperature.
All the transformer shall have the hole (dia 3mm) on the top cover and tank in 4 (four) corners
for sealing purpose.
3.4.6 Transformer core and coils

Transformers core and coils must be new, unused and clean.
Supporting frames of the core and coils of transformers shall be designed to accommodate
variations in tank height.
The core and coil assembly shall have the core and coils rigidly connected to the tank and
suitably closed lugs shall be provided for removing the core and coil assembly from the tank.
Transformer Sl. No. should be marked with emboss on the Supporting frames of the core and
coils of each transformers minimum in 2 (two) places.
3.4.7 Transformer Sealing

A satisfactory lid-sealing gasket shall be provided on each of these transformers to maintain
the seal at extremes of operating temperature. A cold oil level (COL) mark shall be provided
inside each transformer marked COL.
3.4.8 Finshes
a) Painting
Painting ferrous metal work is to be provided with an effective vapour sealing paint finish,
applied generally in accordance with BS 5493 and /or other recognised international standard.
Paint shall be applied to produce a uniform film. Edges corners, crevices, welds, bolts, and
rivets shall receive special attention to maintain the required thickness.
Before painting or filling with oil or compound, all un-galvanised arts shall be completely
clean and free from rust, scale and grease and all external rough metal surfaces on the casting
shall be filled.
The paint system shall be in accordance with best practices for hot and humid locations in a
highly aggressive environment. A description of the paint system to be used and the processed
method of application shall be fully described in the Bid.
All external surfaces shall receive a minimum of three coats of paint. The primary coat shall
contain an approved rust inhibitor and shall be applied as soon as possible after the completion
of the surface preparation. The second coat shall be of oil and weather resisting nature and
have a shade of colour easily distinguishable from the primary. The final coat shall be of oil
and weather resisting and non-fading glossy paint of a colour agreed by the Engineer.
b) Non-ferrous parts and Bright Steel parts

All exposed metal liable iron corrosion during transport is to be appropriately protected by
casting with an approved anti-rusting composition. Other non-ferrous parts shall be adequately
protected against corrosion during shipment or in service.

c) Galvanizing
Galvanizing where applicable shall be applied by the hot dipped process generally in
accordance with ASTM A90/BS EN ISO-1461:1999 or equivalent standard of metal surface
unless specified otherwise.
The zinc coating shall be smooth clean and of uniform thickness and free from defects. The
preparation of galvanizing itself shall not adversely affect the mechanical properties of the
coated material.
All drilling, punching, cutting, shaping and welding of parts shall be completed and all burrs
shall be removed before the galvanizing process is applied.
Surfaces that are in contact with oil shall not be galvanized or cadmium plated.
3.4.9 Rating plate
A brass or stainless steel rating plate shall be fitted to each transformer. The information shall
deeply etched including the diagram of the connections of the windings, the vector diagram
showing the general phase relations of the transformer, and a diagrammatic plan of the
transformer cover showing the terminal positions and marking and other essential particulars.
The plate shall be mounted in an accessible position and preferably adjacent to the tapping
switch if this is located on the side of the tank.
The rating plate shall be fitted below the LV terminals. Rating and diagram plates shall be
attached by a 5 mm brass screw in each corner to 20 mm mild steel brackets welded
horizontally approximately 20 mm from the tank side. The following information is to be
provided on the rating and diagram plate in the English language- clearly and indelibly
marked.
Transformer type
Manufactures name
Manufacturers serial number
year of Manufacture
Number of phases
Rated power
Rated frequency
Rated voltages
Rated currents
Connection symbol
Impedance voltage at rated current
Type of cooling
Total mass
Mass of insulating oil
Insulation levels
Details regarding tapings

Each Transformer should be marked with emboss or welded on the body easily visible from
the ground, with letters of size mentioned against each word(s)/ sentence(s) below:
DESCO (940 mm)

Contract No & Date : (20 mm)
Sl No. ............of ..................KVA
............(20mm)
Sl. No. : ....... of ............KVA ............ (20 mm)
Note:
a) Sl No. .............................. of .................. KVA ............. in meant for particular No. of the
Transformer out of the contracted quantity under this contract.
b) The above marking on the body of the transformer shall be done in addition to the normal
nameplate of the transformer. The nameplate shall be continuous welded on the body of
the Transformer before Pre-delivery inspection.
3.4.10 Terminal Marking

All transformers shall have the primary and secondary terminal markings plainly and
indelibly marked on the transformer adjacent to the relevant terminal. These markings shall
preferably be 25 mm in height. The terminal marking shall be embossed on the body of the
Transformer with respective color code.
3.4.11 Terminal Leads

Outgoing leads shall be brought out through bushings. The leads shall be such that the core
and coils may be removed with the least possible interference with these leads, and they shall
be specially supported inside the transformer to withstand the effects of vibration and short
circuits.
3.4.12 Bushings
All bushings shall be porcelain clad, and shall be of the highest quality. They shall be sealed
in a manner to prevent ingress of moisture and to facilitate removal. The natural bushing and
stems shall be identical to those provided for phase terminations. Bushing stems, nuts and
washers shall be made of brass.
3.4.13 Earthing Connections

Earthling connections shall be provided with connection facilities for 250 mm2 copper
stranded conductor. The bolts shall be located on the lower side of the transformer and be of
M12 size; each shall be clearly indicated with an engraved earth symbol. Two earthling
connections are required on each transformer.
3.4.14 Gaskets
Any gaskets provided with the transformers shall be suitable for making oil tight joints, and
there shall be no deleterious effects of either gaskets or oil when the gaskets are continuously
in contact with hot oil. No gaskets shall be used in which the material of the gasket is
mounted on a textile hacking. Exterior gaskets shall be weatherproof and shall not be affected
by strong sunlight.

3.4.15 Oil
All transformers shall be filled the required level with new, unused, clean, standard mineral
oil after treatment in compliance with IEC 60296 & BS 148.
3.4.16 Tapings
Five voltage tapings shall be provided on the primary side of each transformer and shall give:
+ 2.5%, 0, -2.5%, -5% & and -7.5% steps of the primary nominal voltage.
The tapings shall be selected by an off load tapping switch with an external hand wheel with
provision for looking onto a selected tapping. The switch shall have a positive action designed
to eliminate the possibility of stopping in an intermediate position. The shaft shall be
adequately sealed so that no seepage of oil occurs under all conditions of service. The voltage
operating positions, together with tap change positions shall be clearly and indelibly marked.
3.4.17 Information Required
The following information along with calculation where necessary supported by test results
from independent laboratories shall be supplied with the bid. Where necessary the measured
value shall be corrected to a reference temperature of 75 deg C.
Load losses in kw , and full load at rated voltage;

No load loss;
Percentage impedance at rated KVA;
Total weight in kg (with oil & without oil);
Drawing showing general arrangement and outline dimensions;
Regulation at full load at unity and 0.8 power factor.
3.5 Technical Specification of 11/0.23kV, 25kVA, 1-Phase, Distribution

Transformer
3.5.1 Specification
Sl. No. General : Description

(i) Installation : Outdoor, tropical high rainfall and humidity
(ii) Type : Core Type
(iii) Coolant : Mineral Oil
(iv) Phase : Single
(v) Frequency : 50 C.P.S.
(vi) Windings : Two windings of high conductivity Copper
(vii) Rating : 25KVA
(viii) Rated Voltage : 11/0.23 KV at no load
(ix) Vector Group : 1/1-0
(x) Temperature rise at full load : Shall not exceed the following values.
60 deg. C for oil measured by thermometer by resistance

method over ambient
65 deg. C for winding measured by resistance method over

ambient temperature of 40 deg. C temperature.
(xi) Standards : Performance, design & testing shall be in accordance to
latest revision of IEC-60076 or equivalent standards unless

otherwise specified herein.

(xii) HT side
H.T. Windings : Nominal rated voltage : 11KV
Maximum system voltage : 12KV
Basic insulation level : 75 KV (minimum)
Bushings : Porcelain type outdoor with arcing horns of standard gap,
total 2 nos.
(xiii) LT Side
L.T. Windings : Normal rated voltage : 0.23 kV
Basic Insulation level (BIL): 2.5 kV
Bushings : Porcelain outdoor type total 2 nos.
Tank designed for Clamp mounting on poles;

o First filling of oil shall comply to BS: 148/1972 or latest revision thereof;
o Each H.T bushing shall have suitable bi-metallic connector for accommodating
ACSR/AAC conductor having diameter range from 9 to 14.5 mm;
o Each H.T bushing shall have standard Arching horn to protect transformers from
extra surge;
o Each L.T bushing shall have suitable bi-metallic connector for accommodating
ACSR/AAC Conductor having diameter range from 9 to 14.5 mm;
o The tank and radiator shall be painted with two costs anticorrosive paint of gray
finishing on a suitable prime coat;
o Name plate with transformer rating and winding diagram made of stainless steel
having engraved letters filled with black enamel;
o The L.T. bushing should be installed on the front side of the transformer body. The
LT bushing shall be enclosed in such a way to prevent unauthorized entity.
o Transformer tank complete with cover, necessary opening and gaskets;
o Lugs for lifting and towing complete units including facilities for lifting core and coil
assembly should be provided.
3.5.3 Information Required
The following information along with calculation where necessary supported by test results
from independent laboratories shall be supplied with the bid. Where necessary the measured
value shall be corrected to a reference temperature of 75 deg C.
Load losses in kw , and full load at rated voltage;

No load loss;
Percentage impedance at rated KVA;
Total weight in kg (with oil & without oil);
Drawing showing general arrangement and out line dimensions;
Regulation at full load at unity and 0.8 power factor.

3.6 Technical Specifications of 12KV SF6 Insulated Compact Ring

Main Unit (RMU)
The scope of supply shall include design, manufacture, testing and supply of the following
12KV SF6 Insulated Compact Ring Main Unit with Vacuum Circuit Breakers & 12KV
Terminal Protectors for RMU:
Following the combination of 5 (Five) Function (5 incoming/Outgoing) Outdoor

compatible plug-in type Compact Ring Main Unit comprising of:
- 02Nos. 630A Incoming Vacuum Circuit Breakers with microprocessor based IDMT 3 O/C +
E/F Self Powered relays.
- 01 No. Busbar sectionalizer with VCB
- 03 Nos. 630A Feeder Vacuum Circuit Breakers with microprocessor based IDMT 3 O/C +
E/F Self Powered relays and Transformer Auxiliary Protection.
- 12KV Termination kits for Compact Switchgear Suitable for 630 A rating.
- MS Frame to be fixed below the Compact Switchgear Units (As per suitability).
- There shall be an option of motorized operating mechanism for the breakers in the design.
- The units shall be fully SCADA compatible.
3.6.1 General Technical Requirements:
3.6.2 Service Conditions:

The Ring Main Unit (Compact Switchgear) shall be suitable for operations at a height of up to
1000 meters above sea level.
The Compact Switchgear shall be capable of operating normally within the following
temperature range:
Maximum air temperature: + 40 C
Minimum air temperature: 5 C
The Compact Switchgear shall be capable of being operated in electrically exposed locations.
The Compact Switchgear shall be capable of being exposed to high relative humidity and
ambient air pollution.
3.6.3 System Parameters:

Type Outdoor compatible Plug-in type
Network 3 phase
Rated Voltage 12 kV
Service Voltage 11 kV
System Frequency 50 Hz
Bus bar Rating 630 A
Min Gas pressure 1~1.2 Bar absolute
Filling pressure 1.40 Bar
Min operating temperature 5C
SS Tank: IP 67
IP Rating Front Cover: IP 2X
Cable Cover: IP 3X
Internal Arc test IEC 60298
Lightning Impulse withstand Voltage 75 kV
Power Frequency withstand voltage 28 kV rms (1 min)
Rated Normal Current
Incomer Circuit breaker 630 A

Feeder Circuit-breaker 630 A

Rated Short time current withstand ( 3 sec ) 20 kA
No. of operations at 100% rated current 2000
No. of operations at Full Short Circuit Current 10
Rated Short circuit making capacity of line switches
50 kA peak at Rated Voltage
and earthing switches
3.6.4 General stipulations regarding the design and development of switchgear:
The Compact Switchgear shall meet the criteria for compact, metal-enclosed indoor
switchgear in accordance with IEC 60298.
3.6.4.1 Switchboards
The switchgear and busbar shall all be contained in a robotically welded stainless steel
enclosure filled with SF6 gas. The enclosure should meet the "sealed pressure system"
criterion in accordance with the IEC 60298 standard (i.e a system for which no handling of
gas is required throughout the 30 years of service life), so that refilling is not required. In
addition, manufacturer shall confirm that maximum leakage rate is lower than 0.1 % per year.
It should provide full insulation, making the switchgear insensitive to the environment
(temporary flooding, high humidity), IP67 degree of protection in accordance with
recommendation IEC 60529. The active parts of the switchgear shall be maintenance-free and
the switchboard shall be low-maintenance.
The switchboards shall have an IP2X protection index.
The tank shall be made of at least 3 mm AISI 304 unpainted stainless steel. The switchboards
shall be suitable for mounting on a trench, utilities space or base.
Each switchboard shall be identified by an appropriately sized label which clearly indicates
the functional units and their electrical characteristics.
The switchgear and switchboards shall be designed so that the position of the different
devices is visible to the operator on the front of the switchboard and operations are visible as
well.
In accordance with the standards in effect, the switchboards shall be designed so as to prevent
access to all live parts during operation without the use of tools.
3.6.4.2 Dielectric medium
SF6 gas will be used as dielectric medium for MV Compact Switchgears. SF6 gas used for
the filling of the Compact Switchgear shall be in accordance with IEC 60376. Gas will only
be used for insulation and no interruption will take place inside the gas.
3.6.4.3 Earthing of metallic parts
There shall be continuity between the metallic parts of the switchboard and cables so that
there is no electric field pattern in the surrounding air, thereby ensuring the safety of people.
The substation frames shall be connected to the main earth busbar without dismantling any
busbars.
3.6.4.4 Earthing of the main circuit
The cables shall be earthed by an earthing switch with short-circuit making capacity, in
compliance with IEC 60129 standard. The earthing switch can only be operated when the
main Isolator & Circuit Breaker are open.

The earthing switch shall be fitted with its own operating mechanism and manual closing
shall be driven by a fast-acting mechanism, independent of operator action.
Mechanical interlocking systems shall prevent access to the operating shaft to avoid all
operator errors such as closing the earthing switch when the switch is closed.
3.6.4.5 Feeder Control Circuit-Breaker" feeders
The circuit breakers shall be of the maintenance-free, Vacuum Circuit Breakers type. The
position of the power and earthing contacts shall be clearly visible on the front of the
switchboard. The position indicator shall provide positive contact indication in accordance
with IEC 60265-1 standard. In addition, manufacturer shall prove reliability of indication in
accordance with IEC 60129.
The circuit breakers shall have at least 2 positions: open-disconnected & closed and shall be
constructed in such a way that natural interlocks prevent all unauthorized operations. The
earthing of the feeder shall be by a Fault Making Earth Switch. The earth switch shall be
mechanically interlocked with the isolators / breaker to prevent any unauthorized operation.
They shall be fully mounted and inspected in the factory.
An operating mechanism can be used to manually close the circuit breaker and charge the
mechanism in a single movement.
It shall be fitted with a local system for manual tripping by an integrated push button. There
will be no automatic reclosing.
The circuit breaker shall be associated with an integrated protection unit that will operate
without any auxiliary power supply and shall include:
- 03 No. Ring Core Current Transformers (per breaker module) for Protection & CT Ratio shall
have 400-200/1, 5P10 and Burden 5VA.
- Self Powered Microprocessor based Over Current and Earth Fault relay with high set.
The protection system will ensure circuit breaker tripping as of a minimum operating current
(Is) which is the rated current of the underground network to be protected and may be set to
following ratings from 8 to 600 A.
The phase protection shall have two separately adjustable settings
The low setting may be chosen with definite time or IDMT. The IDMT curves are in
compliance with the IEC 60255-3 standard. They are of the standard inverse, very inverse and
extremely inverse types.
The low setting may also be used with the SI curve.
The high setting shall be of the definite time / instantaneous type
Like phase protection, earth protection shall be fitted with two separately adjustable settings.
There should be provision of flag Relay on each vacuum breaker module for indication of
Trip on Fault in line.
The cable cover door should be pad lockable and should be Tamper and Arc proof.
Cable charge indication should be provided for each Compact Switchgear.
Provision for cable door interlocks such that the doors cannot be opened unless the Earth
switch is closed.
There should be provision of hinged doors in the Compact Switchgear.

Cables shall be terminated from the front of the switchgear. The switchgear should require no
working space from the rear. It should be capable of installing alongside the wall.
It shall be possible to replace / upgrade the CTs at site.
There shall be a provision for SF6 Gas refilling / top-up at site.
3.6.5 Compact Switchgear bushings and Cable terminations
(a) Bushing
The bushing should be conveniently located for working with cables specified and allow for
the termination of these cables in accordance with the instructions supplied.
The profiles of the cable connection bushings shall be in compliance with EN-50181 standard.
(b) Cable entry and Terminations

The Cable entry shall be from bottom and should be front terminated.
Cable clamps
A non ferro-magnetic cable clamp arrangement must be provided for all network cables
terminated on the Compact Switchgear
3.6.6 Padlocking facilities
The circuit breakers and earthing switches can be locked in the open or closed position by 1 to
3 padlocks 6 to 8mm in diameter.
3.6.7 Voltage indicator lamps and phase comparators
Each function shall be equipped with a voltage indicator box on the front of the device to
indicate whether or not there is voltage in the cables. The capacitive dividers will supply low
voltage power to the lamps.
Three inlets can be used to check the synchronization of phases.
This device shall be in compliance with IEC 61958 standard.
3.6.8 Safety of people

Any accidental overpressure inside the sealed chamber will be limited by the opening of a
pressure limiting device in the rear part of the enclosure. Gas will be released to the rear of
the switchboard away from the operator. Manufacturer shall provide type test report to prove
compliance with IEC 298 appendix AA 'Internal fault'.
3.6.9 Operating lever

An anti-reflex mechanism on the operating lever shall prevent any attempts to reopen
immediately after closing of the switch or earthing switch.
All manual operations will be carried out on the front of the switchboard.
The effort exerted on the lever by the operator should not be more than 250 N for the switch
and 250 N for the circuit breaker.

3.6.10 Front plate

The front plate shall have an IP2X degree of protection. The front shall include a clear mimic
diagram which indicates the different functions.
The position indicators shall give a true reflection of the position of the main contacts. They
shall be clearly visible to the operator.
The lever operating direction shall be clearly indicated in the mimic diagram.
The manufacturer's plate shall include the switchboard's main electrical characteristics.
3.6.11 Test:
A.TYPE TEST:
The bider should, along with the bid, submit copies of all Type test certificate of their make in
full shape as confirming to relevant IEC of latest issue obtain from KEMA, CESI, CPRI,
CEPRI, PEHLA or any internationally accredited independent testing laboratory
(Accreditation document shall be provided along with bid).
TYPE TESTS
1 Impulse Test with breaker inside the cubicle
2 Temperature rise test with breaker inside the cubicle.
3 Short Circuit Test with breaker inside the Cubicle
4 Dielectric Test
5 Test of Apparatus Ie circuit breaker and earthing switches.
6 Are Fault Test
B. ACCEPTANCE AND ROUTINE TESTS:
All acceptance and routine test as stipulated in the latest IEC- shall be carried out by the
supplier. The supplier shall give at least 7 days advance intimation to enable to depute our
representative for witnessing the tests.
C. ROUTINE TESTS:
STANDARD IEC 60298
1. Withstand Voltage at power Frequency for all current carrying parts including wiring.
2. Measurement of Resistence of the Main Circuit.
3. Gas Leakage Test
4. PARTIAL DISCHARGE TEST
5. Withstand voltage on Auxiliary circuit.
6. Operation of Function Locks, Interlocks, Signaling Devices and Auxiliary Devices.
7. Suitable & correct operation of protection, Control Instruments and electrical connection
of the circuit breaker operating mechanism (PRIMARY & SECONDARY INJECTION)
8. Verification of Wiring.
9. Visual Inspection.
3.6.12 Manufacturing Facilities:
The manufacturer shall ensure workmanship of high quality. There shall be adequate
machinery tools & tackles such that the product shall meet the internationally accepted
standards. The Manufacturing facility shall be equipped with the following:
Welding station for Stainless steel main tank, ensuring a leak rate of less than .1%
per annum

Work benches with adjustable work benches and torque wrenches, giving flexibility
workmen for proper tightness of internal components of sealed tank.
State-of the-art Gas leakage testing and gas filling system ensuring the quality of
sealing and have precision to measure leak rate less than 0.1% per annum.
High Voltage testing station to have high voltage power frequency test and partial
discharge measurement.
Computerized system to measure time travel characteristic of breaker before sealing
of the tank.
Micro-ohm and circuit breaker testing via a computerize analyzer machine.
Computerize SF6 filling and testing facility.
Partial Discharge lab for conducting the partial discharge and high voltage test on the
complete product.
It is mandatory to have the complete assemble tank tested for partial discharge to
ensure a high life and reliability of the product.
3.7 Particular Requirements

3.7.1 Loss Capitalization (for both single and three phase transformers):
Power losses in transformers of different makes shall be considered in evaluating the bids.
After assessment of losses, the same shall be capitalized. The loss capitalization of a
Distribution Transformers will be calculated by the following formula:
C = Tk. 445,901.28 P0 + Tk. 196,952.86 Pfl.
Where:
C = Capitalized cost of Transformer loss in Bangladesh Taka.
P0 = No Load loss (i.e. Core loss) in KW at ONAN rating at principal tap position.
Pfl = Full Load Copper Loss in KW at 75C ONAF rating at principal tap position plus the loss
for cooling fan in KW.
The capitalized cost shall be added to the Bid Price for the purpose of obtaining evaluated
Bid Price.
In case of award of the contract, a specialized engineering team nominated by DESCO

shall visit at its own expenses and verify the declared losses by the suitable test on
random basis and compare with these losses declared. All equipment required for
these tests shall be provided by the contractor. If losses are to be found higher than the
declared losses in a transformer of a certain lot, then entire lot of the transformers shall
be liable for rejection.
3.7.2 The followings shall be submitted along with the Bid:
(i) Details calculation of load losses (both No load and full Load losses) based on
material characteristics for transformers.
(ii) Constructional diagram and dimensions of the offered items.
(iii) Catalogue containing detail technical information of offered items with detail
technical information and that shall be indicated by red ink.

(iv) Outline dimension & drawings of offered items.

(v) Type Test Reports including Test Certificate on offered Distribution
Transformers and Ring Main Unit (RMU) or higher capacity at offered
voltage level in accordance with the latest version of IEC Standard. These
tests shall be from an independent and well-known testing laboratory like
KEMA, CESI, CPRI, CEPRI, PEHLA, BUET or any other internationally
accredited laboratory (accreditation certificate shall be submitted).
Test reports other than English Language must be translated in English and
signed by competent authority.
The Type Test Reference number and also other references like name and
designation of contact/signatory person of the laboratory, contact number, fax
number and email address shall be furnished along with the type test report.

(vii) All data schedules duly filled up with appropriate technical data;
Test reports for transformers:
bidders shall include in their Technical Proposal the following routine tests, type tests and
Short circuit withstands tests (or details calculations on the basis of design data) as prescribed
in IEC-60076 for 11/0.415KV, 200KVA, 3-Phase, Dyn11 distribution transformer and
11/0.23KV, 25KVA, 1-Phase distribution transformer.
Routine tests
1) Measurement of turn ratio test.
2) Vector group test.
3) Measurement of winding resistance.
4) Measurement of insulation resistance.
5) Measurement of no-load loss & no-load current.
6) Measurement of impedance voltage & load loss.
7) Dielectric withstands Tests.
8) Transformer oil tests.
Type tests
1) Impulse Voltage withstands test.
2) Temperature rise test
Special tests
1) Short circuit withstands tests or details calculations along with thermal & mechanical
calculations on the basis of design data.
3.7.2 Acceptability on account of losses
Variation in the loss figures within the provisions of relevant IEC will be accepted by
imposing penalty. But the Contract will be cancelled if losses exceed the provisions of
relevant IEC by an amount in excess of followings:

Total losses : +10%

Component Losses : +15% of each component loss
The following formula shall be used for calculating the penalty to be imposed:
Amount of Penalty (Tk.) = Contract Price for transformer X (Measured total Loss- Guaranteed total loss)
Guaranteed total loss
3.7.4 Packing:
The complete Distribution Transformer is to be export-packed and properly protected for

shipment, rough transportation and storage. Specific care shall be taken for protection in store
and reference is made to the climatic condition prevailing in Bangladesh.
Each Distribution Transformer shall be sealed in waterproof polyethylene bag having a

silicagel packet placed inside the unit and then packed in polystyrene foam casket closed by
self adhesive tape. Rating of the unit shall be marked by marker pen or label on the foam for
easy identification. The packing case should be able to withstand accidental direct exposure to
weather for reasonable period.
The complete goods/materials are to be export-packed and properly protected for shipment,
rough transportation and storage. Specific care shall be taken for protection in store and
reference is made to the climatic condition prevailing in Bangladesh.
Each item shall be protected by wrapping of suitable gauge polyethylene and packed in non-
returnable wooden carat. It is mentioned here that no damage of wooden cartoon shall be
acceptable during transportation, handling, loading, un-loading, carrying, storing. If damaged,
it should be repair by the suppliers own arrangement without extra charge from the
Purchaser.
package.
- Name of supplier.
- Port of Loading.

- Contract Number.
- Measurements.
DESCO
BANGLADESH
delivery/pre-shipment to inspect and test the goods/materials, to confirm their conformity to
the specification, at the manufacturers premises, workmanship and performance.
The Purchaser through a two- member Team of its own may carry out Stage Inspection during
manufacturing of goods at the manufacturing plant(s).
testing as provided in the contract and unless the Purchaser shall attend at the place so named
on date, which the supplier has stated in his notice, the supplier may proceed with the tests,
forward to the Purchaser duly certified copies of test readings.
In case the Purchaser intends to attend the test, the supplier shall be informed accordingly in
writing, so that the supplier can take action.
DESCOs inspection team will witness the following test of not less than 5% of total quantity
ready for delivery on random sampling basis (sample selected by the inspection team) during
factory test in manufacturers factory premises:

Measurement of turn ratio test;

Vector group test;
Measurement of winding resistance;
Measurement of insulation resistance;
Measurement of no load loss & no-load current;
Measurement of impedance voltage & load loss;
Dielectric withstands test;
transformer oil test;
Temperature rise test.
Besides DESCOs inspection team will perform some physical test of at least 5%
transformers of each batch on random sampling basis during factory test:
Transformer tank sheet thickness (top bottom & side);
Hot dip galvanization test as per standard IEC or BS-729 of all bolts & nuts
connected with transformer tank, conservator, radiator etc.;
Dimension of bolted type bimetallic connector for H.T. and L.T. bushing;
Dimension of tanks;
Dimension of core dia , height and measurement of weight of active parts as per
demand of DESCOs inspection teak;
Dimension of coil, inner dia & outer dia (HT & LT) etc.;
Checking of creep age distance of HT/LT bushings.
relevant tests, the Purchaser shall notify the contractor in writing to that effect.
Nothing in this clause shall in any way release the supplier from any warranty or other
Cost related to inspection and testing:
Where the supplier provides for tests on the premises of the supplier or of any
test.
All costs pertaining to Inspector's fees, travel, lodging and incidental expenses shall be
borne by the purchaser.
arrival of the goods at the designated store of DESCO. The program of such inspection shall

be intimated to the representative of Supplier. The PLI committee in its report shall mention
the exact/assessed quantity of goods. The Post Landing Inspection of goods shall generally
cover the following, but not limited to it:
(iii) Visual Inspection of goods;

(iv) Conformance with approved drawings with respect to dimensions/type/size.
(v) Megger test on all supplied Transformers.
3.8.1 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule of 11/0.415KV, 3-

Phase, 200 KVA Distribution Transformer
(to be filled in by the manufacturer, otherwise bid shall not be considered for evaluation)
Sl. Manufacturers
Description Required Specification
No. Particulars
1 2 3 4
1 Manufacturers Name & Address To be mentioned
2 Manufacturers Type/ Model No. To be mentioned
3 KVA Rating 200
4 Number of Phases 3
5 Rated frequency, Hz 50
6 Rated Primary Voltage, KV 11
7 Rated no load sec. Voltage ,V 415
8 Vector group Dyn11
9 Highest system voltage of:
a) Primary winding, KV 12
b) Secondary winding ,V 457
10 Basic insulation level, KV 75
11 Power frequency withstand voltage, KV:
a) HT Side 28
b) LT Side 2.5
12 Type of cooling ONAN
13 Max. Temp. Rise over 400C of ambient supported by Calculation (to be submitted)of Load Loss,
Temperature Rise and Heat Dissipation by Radiator on the basis of Design Data:
a) Windings deg. C 65
b) Top oil deg. C 60
14 Type of primary tapping off load% +1x2.5%,0,
-3x2.5%
15 Percentage impedance at 750 C,% 4%
16 No-load loss, Watts 435
17 Load losses at rated full load at 750 C, 2820
Watts
18 Magnetising current at normal voltage, To be mentioned
Amps
19 Efficiency at 750 C and 100% load:
a) At 1.0 power factor, % To be mentioned
b) At 0.8 power factor, % To be mentioned

Sl. Manufacturers
No. Particulars
1 2 3 4
23 Regulation of full load :
24 Transformer Oil:
a) Type of oil Mineral Insulating Oil
b) Manufacturers Name & Address To be mentioned
25 Total weight of oil, Kg To be mentioned
26 Breakdown Voltage at 2.5mm gap between >50 KV

electrodes
Transformer Core:
27 Manufacturers Name & Address To be mentioned
28 Total weight of core, kg To be mentioned
29 Material of core & grading To be mentioned
30 Core Loss/kg, supported by Characteristic To be mentioned
Curve & Core Manufacturers Brochure
31 Thickness of core, mm To be mentioned
32 Core Dia, mm To be mentioned
33 Max. Magnetic flux density, Tesla < 1.7
Transformer Windings
34 Copper Conductors Manufacturers Name To be mentioned
& Address
35 Material of windings copper
36 Winding resistance of:
a) H.T. Winding, Ohm. (per phase at To be mentioned
75oC)
b) L.T. Winding, milli Ohm. (per To be mentioned
phase at 75oC)
37 Current density of:
a) H.T. Winding, Amps/sp.mm To be mentioned
b) L.T. Winding, Amps/sp.mm To be mentioned
38 Outer, Inner & Mean dia of copper winding:
a) H.T. Winding, mm To be mentioned
b) L.T. Winding, mm To be mentioned
39 Size of Copper Conductor:
a) H.T. Windings SWG, dia in mm To be mentioned
& area in mm2
b) L.T. winding SWG, area in mm2 To be mentioned
40 Number of Turns:
a) H.T. Winding, nos. To be mentioned
b) L.T. Winding, nos. To be mentioned
41 Copper Weight of windings:

Sl. Manufacturers
No. Particulars
1 2 3 4
a) H.T. Winding, Kg To be mentioned
b) L.T. Winding, Kg To be mentioned
42 Total weight of copper windings, Kg To be mentioned
43 Dimension of Transformer:
a) Width, mm To be mentioned
b) Length, mm To be mentioned
c) Height, mm To be mentioned
d) Tank Sheet thickness of top , To be mentioned
bottom &side, mm
e) Total weight of transformer tank, To be mentioned
Kg
44 a) Total weight of active part(core, coil To be mentioned
and other accessories), Kg
b) Total weight of complete Transformer To be mentioned
including fittings & oil , Kg
45 Type of breathings To be mentioned
46 Name of relevant IEC or other Equivalent To be mentioned
Standards for Design, Manufacture,
testing and performance.
47 Drawing:
a) General Arrangement & Outline To be submitted
Dimensions
b) Internal Construction Details/ Sectional To be submitted
drawing of active parts including
Insulation arrangement
c) HT & LT Bushings with dimension & To be submitted
current ratings
d) Cross-section & Dimensional drawing To be submitted
of Core & Windings
e) Radiator with detail dimensional To be submitted
drawing
f) Tap changer with dimension & current To be submitted
ratings.
Signature of the Bidder..................................

3.8.2 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule of 11/0.240KV, 1-

Phase, 25KVA Distribution Transformer
(to be filled in by the manufacturer, otherwise bid shall not be considered for evaluation)
Sl. No. Description Unit Manufacturers Particulars

(i) Name of the Manufacturer
(ii) Type Designation
(iii) Reference Standard IEC
(iv) Rated Voltage
Primary KV
Secondary Volts
(v) Number of Phase Single
(vi) Frequency Hz
(vii) Rating of Transformer KVA
(viii) Vector Group
(ix) Winding Materials
(x) Load Loss (at rated voltage)
(a)load KW.
(b) load KW.
(c) full load KW.
(xi) No- Load Loss KW
(xii) Excitation A
(xiii) Full Load Current A
(xiv) % Impedance at Rated KVA
(xv) % Resistance at Rated KVA
(xvi) Weight
(a)with oil Kg
(b)Without oil Kg
(xvii) Regulation at
(a)unity power factor
(b)0.8 power factor
(xviii) Efficiency at unity Power factor
(a) load
(b) load
(c)full load
(xix) Efficiency at 0.8 Power factor
(a) load
(b) load
(c)full load
(xxi) Flux density in iron at normal voltage and
frequency & at normal ratio (no-load)
(a)cores Tesla
(b)Yokes Tesla
(xxii) Maximum Current density in Winding at
Continuous Maximum Rating (C.M.R)
(a) HV Winding A/mm2
(b) LV Winding A/mm2.
(xxiii) Insulation of
(a) HV Windings
(a) LV Windings
(xxiv) Winding Connections brazed or Crimped?
(xxv) Types of winding

(a) HV Winding
(b) LV Winding
(xxvi) Transformer oil : manufacture, type & class of
oil to IEC 60296 :
(xxvii) Installation
(xxviii) Coolant
(xxix) Temperature rise at full load
(xxx) Major Components
(xxxi) HT side
(xxxii) H.T. Windings
(xxxiii) Bushings
(xxxiv) LT Side
(xxxv) L.T. Windings
(xxxvi) Bushings
Signature of the Bidder...............................

3.8.3 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule of 12 KV SF6 Insulated Ring Main Unit
(RMU)
(to be filled up by the manufacturer with appropriated data, otherwise the bid will be rejected)
Suppliers /
Sl.
Description Unit Required Specification Manufacturers
No.
Particulars
Manufacturers Name &
01 To be mentioned
Country
02 Manufacturers Code No. To be mentioned
Outdoor compatible,
03 Type of Installation
Bolted/plug-in type
04 Rated System Voltage KV 11
05 Highest System Voltage KV 12
06 Frequency HZ 50
07 Rated current of bus Amps 630
Coupler breaker capacity
08 Amps 630
(in case of 05-function)
09 Incomer breaker capacity Amps 630
10 Feeder breaker capacity Amps 630
11 System Neutral Effectively earth
12 Minimum Gas pressure Bar 1~1.2 absolute
13 Filling pressure Bar 1.40 (Minimum) @20 deg C
Minimum operating
14 C 5
temperature
SS Tank : IP67
15 IP Rating Front Cover: IP 2X
Cable Cover: IP 3X
16 Internal Arc test IEC 60298
Lightning Impulse
17 75KV
Withstand Voltage
Power frequency
18 28 KVrms-1 min
withstand voltage
Incomer Circuit Breaker-
19 Rated normal current 630A;
Feeder Circuit Breaker-630A
Rate short time current for
20 KA 20( Minimum)
03 sec.
No. of operation at 100%
21 Nos. 2000 (Minimum)
rated current
No. of operation at full
22 Nos. 10 (Minimum)
short circuit current
Rated short circuit making
23 capacity of line switched KA 50KA peak at rated voltage
& earthing switched
Guaranteed life of the
24 Years 30 (minimum)
equipment

mmX
25 Dimension mmX To be mentioned
mm
26 Relay
i. To be mentioned
Country
ii. Manufacturers Code No. To be mentioned
27 CT
i. Ratio 400-200/1
ii. Burden VA 5VA (max)
iii. To be mentioned
Country
iv. Manufacturers Code No. To be mentioned
Signature of the Bidder..................................

4. Drawings

Lot-4of Package-2
Supply of Transformer Protection Equipment (11KV LA and DOFC),

LV MCCB, Capacitor Bank and Sectionalizing Switch

Contents
1. List of Goods and Related Services......................................................................................... 6-148
2. Delivery and Completion Schedule ......................................................................................... 6-129
3. Technical Specifications .......................................................................................................... 6-130
4. Drawings.................................................................................................................................. 6-153

Lot No.: Lot-4of Package-2

Lot Name: Supply of Transformer Protection Equipment (11KV LA
and DOFC), LV MCCB, Capacitor Bank and Sectionalizing Switch
Item Name of Goods or Description Quantity Unit of
No. Related Services Measure
ment
01 Supply & Delivery of: 11 KV Lightning Arrester (LA) 10000 Nos.
02 Supply & Delivery of: 11 KV Drop Out Fuse Cut Out (DOFC) 10000 Nos.
with 50A fuse element
03 Spare Fuse Element
3.1 Supply & Delivery of: 50A 20000 Nos.
04 Supply & Delivery of: 400V, 200A, Moulded Case Circuit 4000 Nos.
Breaker (MCCB) with enclosure
05 Supply & Delivery of: 400V, 400A, Moulded Case Circuit 2000 Nos.
Breaker (MCCB) with enclosure
06 Supply & Delivery of: 11KV 3X100 KVAR Fixed Type 100 Sets
Capacitor Bank
07 Supply & Delivery of: 11KV OFF-LOAD Isolator 300A without 150 Sets
Earth blade.


Required
No. of Goods or
Completion
Date for
Related
Services
Port of Entry
for Goods
offered from
270 days
outside the
counting
Purchasers
from 21
Country and
days after
Ex-Works for
issuance of
Goods offered
CL.
from within the
Purchasers
country.
Group-1
01 11 KV Lightning Arrester 10000
(LA) Nos.
02 11 KV Drop Out Fuse Cut 10000

Out (DOFC) with 50A fuse Nos.
element
03 Spare Fuse Element
3.1 50A 20000
Nos.
3.2 25A 5000 Nos.
3.3 15A 20000
Nos.
04 400V, 200A, Moulded Case 4000 Nos.
Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
with enclosure
05 400V, 400A, Moulded Case 2000 Nos.
Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
with enclosure
06 11KV 3X100 KVAR Fixed 100 Sets

Type Capacitor Bank
07 11KV OFF-LOAD Isolator 150 Sets

300A without Earth blade.
Seal and Signature of the Bidder: .

Table of Contents

3.1 General 6-126
3.2 References 6-126
3.3 Climate Condition 6-127
3.4 Transformer Protection Equipment (11KV LA and DOFC)
3.4.1 Specification of 11 KV Pole/Structure Mounted LA or 6-127
Surge Arrestor
3.4.2 Features and Accessories 6-127
3.4.3 Specification of 11KV Pole mounted DOF Cut-Out & Fuse 6-128
Link
3.5 LV MCCB
3.5.1 Specification of 400 Volts MCCB (200 Amps) 6-129
3.5.2 Features and Accessories of 400 Volts MCCB (200 Amps) 6-130
3.5.3 Specification of 400 Volts MCCB (400 Amps) 6-130
3.6 11KV 3X100 KVAR Fixed Type Capacitor Bank

3.6.1 Technical specification of Capacitor Bank 6-132
3.6.2 Specification details 6-132
3.6.4 Construction and Features 6-133
3.6.5 Bushing 6-133
3.6.6 Internal Discharge Resistor 6-134
3.6.7 Outside Surfcae of Capacitor case 6-134
3.6.8 Name Plate 6-134
3.7 11KV OFF-LOAD Isolator 300A without Earth blade
3.7.1 Specification of 11 KV Off-Load Isolator without Earth 6-134
Blade
3.8.1 Information Required 6-136
3.8.3 Packing 6-136
3.8.5 Costs related to inspection and testing 6-138
3.8.6 Post Landing Inspection (PLI) 6-138
4.0 Guranteed Technical Data Scheule for
4.1 11 LV Lightning arrester 6-139
4.2 11 KV DOF Cut-out and Fuse Link 6-140
4.3 400V, 200A, 3-Ph MCCB with Enclosure 6-141
4.4 400V, 400A, 3-Ph MCCB with Enclosure 6-144
4.5 11 KV Off-load Isolator 300 A without Earth Blade 6-147

Technical Specifications
The Goods and Related Services shall comply with following Technical Specifications:
3.1 General

or equipment supplied shall be manufactured, installed and tested in accordance with the
latest revision of the relevant standard unless otherwise specified.
prior to the date of the letter or invitation to Bid, the reference shall be deemed to be to such
Deviations from this Specification or standards referred to above shall be given in the Bid and
reasonable precautions shall be taken in the design of equipment and of the works, to ensure
the safety of personnel concerned with the operation and maintenance of the works.
All equipment supplied shall be designed and be of such quality as to require the minimum or
maintenance during service.
No welding, plugging or filling or defective parts shall be carried out without the prior
sanction in writing of the Purchaser.
Corresponding parts of similar equipment, and equipment liable to renewal, shall be fully
interchangeable and the Contractor will be required to demonstrate this feature to the
Purchasers satisfaction.
All equipment shall operate without under vibration and with the least practical amount of
noise.
All equipment shall be designed to minimize corona or other electrical discharges.
All electrical components shall be adequately rated for their most onerous duty and the
specified ambient temperature. When equipment is mounted in panels, cubicles etc., due
account shall be taken of any heat generated by the equipment therein and the components
shall be appropriately selected, rated or de-rated as necessary to suit the most onerous
operating temperatures within the enclosure.
3.2 References

The offered goods/material must be suitable for working in the climate conditions of
Bangladesh as described below:

Humidity : 98%
3.4 Technical Specifications of Transformer Protection

Equipment (11KV LA and DOFC)
3.4.1 Specification of 11KV Pole/Structure Mounted LA or Surge Arrester
Standard : Design, Manufacturing, Testing and performance shall be

in accordance to IEC 99-4 or equivalent international
standards.
General
Installation : Outdoor pole/cross arm angle/channel/structure mounted.
Type/Model : Zinc oxide (ZnO)
Construction : As per relevant IEC standard
Application : Protection of 11/0.415KV distribution Transformers.
Nominal rated Voltage : 11KV
Maximum System Voltage : 12KV
System Frequency : 50Hz
Type of System : 3Phase with effectively earthed neutral.
Rated Arrester voltage : 10KV RMS
Class : 1
Rated Arrester current : 10KA (8/20 micro second wave)
High current withstand : 100KA
Pressure relief class : 20KA (rms Symmetrical)
Basic Insulation level (BIL) at : 80KV crest
1.2/50 micro sec impulses.
Lightning impulse Residual : 39KV crest
Voltage at 8/20 micro sec.
Current wave
Creepage distance : 30mm/KV
3.4.2 Features and Accessories:
The Arrester shall be ZnO type, basically consisting of gap-less hermetically sealed in with
nonlinear volt-ampere characteristics with high-energy capacity. The earthing terminal shall
be suitable to accommodate AAC/ACSR Copper Conductor of diameter from 10mm to
15mm.
ZnO type Arrester shall be excellent thermal stability for high-energy surge external pollution
& temporary over voltage.

Lightning Arrester with nominal discharge current of 10KA will be used to the protection of
11/0.415KV distribution transformers and shall be supplied complete with galvanized steel
brackets and fixing bolts, nuts, washers for mounting. Brackets shall be provided for steel
cross-arm mounting. All ferrous parts exposed to atmosphere shall be hot galvanized after
fabrication as per latest revision of BS-729 or equivalent standard.
Line lead and earthing terminals with clamps to shall be suitable to accommodate
AAC/ACSR/Copper Conductor of diameter from 6mm to 12mm.
Lightning Arrester shall be suitable for mounting vertically. The housing shall be as per latest
version of IEC 60099.4.
3.4.3 Specification of 11KV Pole mounted DOF Cut-Out & Fuse Link
Standard Design, Manufacturing, Testing and performance shall be in

accordance with IEC 282-2 or equivalent international standards
unless otherwise specified herein.
General
Installation : Outdoor cross arm angle or channel or structure mounted on poles.
Type/Model : Open Drop Out Expulsion.
Construction : As per relevant IEC standard
Application : Protection of 11/0.415KV Distribution Transformer.
Nominal rated Voltage : 11KV
Maximum System : 12KV
Voltage
System Frequency : 50Hz
Type of System : 3-Phase with effectively earthed neutral.
Continuous current : 100 Amps.
rating
Interrupting Capacity of : 8KA RMS Symmetrical.
the Cut-Out (Min)
Fuse holder type : Heavy duty sealed cap with Eye at both ends of Fuse holder.
Fuse Link Rated current : 50, 25 & 15Amps.
(continuous)
Basic Insulation Level : 75KV
(BIL)
Fuse Link Type : K-Type, as per standard medium melting high surge with 50A
Fuse Link.
3.4.4 Features and Accessories
Each Cut-Out shall be complete including Fuse holder and Fuse Link.
The design shall provide reasonable protection against earthing by animals, birds etc. The
cover shall be porcelain sealed.
Terminal shall be tin plated and shall be suitable to accommodate AAC/ACSR/Copper

conductor of diameter from 6mm to 12mm.
Insulator of the unit shall be made of porcelain and shall be suitable to withstand a mechanical
force of 1.6 KN.

All movables current carrying contacts shall be silver-plated.
Adjustable brackets shall be provided for steel cross-arm mounting with nuts, bolts, etc for
mounting.
All hardware shall be non-ferrous metal or if ferrous it shall be hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication as per latest revision of BS-729 or equivalent standard. All mounting brackets
shall be provided for steel cross-arm mounting with nuts, bolts, etc.
These shall be provided with latest mechanism, which shall open the fuse element when the
fuse has operated. The latest mechanism shall be constructed to be easily operated from the
ground with the aid of an operating stick. Current carrying goods/material shall be made of
copper alloy.
The fuse element shall be totally enclosed by a fuse holder to protect it from the atmosphere
on specified electrical characteristics of the fuse Units shall be as per IEC-60282-2.
3.5 Technical Specifications of LV MCCB

3.5.1 Specification of 400 Volts MCCB (200 Amps)
Standard : Design, Manufacturing, Testing and Performance shall e

01 in accordance to IEC 60947, Part 1 & 2 Standards.
02 General :
03 Application : For Transformer secondary and/or feeder protection.
04 Installation : Outdoor panel/box mounted.
05 Enclosure : Weather proof moulded case.
06 Frame size : 250 AF.
07 Rated Operating voltage : 415VAC
08 Maximum System : 456 VAC
voltage
09 System frequency : 50 Hz.
10 Number of Poles : 3 (three), for three-phase operation.
11 Rated continuous current : 200 Amps.
12 Interrupting current : Minimum 40KA, RMS symmetrical at 415VAC under
standard duty cycle.
13 Operating condition : The climatic conditions as specified below:
The climate is humid and tropical. Maximum humidity
and temperature occur simultaneously. Relative humidity
100% maximum. Altitude less than 300 meters above sea
level. Ambient temperature variation +3 to 45 degree
Celsius.
14 Operating Mechanism : Quick make, quick break type, mechanically trip free
indicator for ON-TRIP-OFF position. Must be equipped
with push to Trip button in front of Breaker.
15 Trip : Micro Processor Based Electronic/Mechanical Trip Unit.
Magnetic Adjustable: Magnetic element setting provision
for short circuit protection variable from 400% to
1000%.
Thermal Adjustable Thermal element setting provision
for time delay overload protection variable from 40% to
100%.

16 Construction : Contract shall be made of silver alloy bolted terminal for

front wire on entry from top and bottom. The unit shall be
weather proof, dust proof and tropicalized, toggle switch
for ON OFF. Appropriate design grid arc quenchers
to make it safe at highest interrupting duty.
17 Enclosure : The enclosure shall be made of polymeric housing of
Gray or Black colour with minimum thickness 3.0 mm.
The enclosures shall have hinged type front door with a
cylindrical built-in-lock. The enclosure shall be rain, dust
and weather proof in accordance to IP54. The design &
material used for the enclosure must be shock proof and
fire retardant.
The Outdoor type enclosure shall be provided with

adequate means for outdoor pole mounting and shall be
supplied complete with all necessary fitting facilities by
clamping or stainless steel strap & buckles arrangement
with Poles.
The unit shall have slanted roof and rain shed for
Outdoors type. The unit shall have bottom entry for
incoming of 95 sq.mm PVC insulated, PVC sheathed
Copper cable through rubber glands.
The following designations shall be printed on the front

door as follows :
200A MCCB
400 Volts
Sl. No.
DESCO with Monogram.
3.5.2 Features and Accessories:
Main parts must be protected from water. Terminal shall be complete with bolts and suitable
for 95 and 120 sq. mm compression type copper connectors to accommodate 95 and 120 sq.
mm cable. The connectors so required also are supplied along with the MCCBs.
3.5.3 Specification of 400 Volts MCCB (400 Amps)
01 Standard : Design, Manufacturing, Testing and Performance shall be

in accordance to IEC 60947, Part 1 & 2 Standards.
02 General :
03 Application : For Transformer secondary and/or feeder protection.

04 Installation : Outdoors panel mounting.
05 Enclosure : Weather proof moulded case.
06 Frame size : 400 AF.

07 Rated Operating voltage : 415/240 volts, A. C.
08 Maximum design : Not less than 457/264 volts A. C.

voltage
09 System frequency : 50 Hz.
10 Number of Poles : 3 (three), for three phase operation.
11 Rated continuous current : 400 Amperes.
12 Interrupting current : Minimum 40KA, RMS symmetrical at 415VAC under
standard duty cycle.
13 Operating condition : The climatic conditions as specified below:
The climate is humid and tropical. Maximum humidity
and temperature occur simultaneously. Relative humidity
100% maximum. Altitude less than 300 meters above sea
level. Ambient temperature variation +3 to 45 degree
Celsius.
14 Operating Mechanism : Quick make, quick break type, mechanically trip free
indicator for ON- TRIP-OFF position. Must be
equipped with push to Trip button in front of Breaker.
15 Trip : Micro Processor Based Electronic/Mechanical Trip Unit.
Magnetic Adjustable: Magnetic element setting provision
for short circuit protection variable from 400% to
1000%.
Thermal Adjustable Thermal element setting provision
for time delay overload protection variable from 40% to
100%.
16 Construction : Contract shall be made of silver alloy bolted terminal for
front wire on entry from top and bottom. The unit shall be
weather proof, dust proof and tropicalized, toggle switch
for ON OFF. Appropriate design grid arc quenchers
to make it safe at highest interrupting duty.
17 Standards : Performance, design and testing shall be in accordance to
latest revision of British or IEC standard except as
specified herein.
Enclosure : The enclosure shall be made of polymeric housing of
Gray or Black colour with minimum thickness 3.0 mm.
The enclosures shall have hinged type front door with a

cylindrical built-in-lock. The enclosure shall be rain, dust
and weather proof in accordance to IP54. The design &
material used for the enclosure must be shockproof and
fire retardant.
The Outdoor type enclosure shall be provided with

adequate means for outdoor pole mounting and shall be
supplied complete with all necessary fitting facilities by
clamping or stainless steel strap & buckles arrangement
with Poles.
The unit shall have slanted roof and rain shed for
Outdoors type. The unit shall have bottom entry for
incoming of 95 sq. mm PVC insulated, PVC sheathed
Copper cable through rubber glands.
The following designations shall be printed on the front

door as follows :
400A MCCB
400 Volts

Sl. No.
Main parts must be protected from water. Terminal shall be complete with bolts and suitable
for 95 and 120 sq. mm compression type copper connectors to accommodate 95 and 120 sq.
mm cable. The connectors so required also are supplied along with the MCCBs.
3.6 Technical Specification of Capactior Bank
3.6.1 Technical specification of 3X100 KVAR fixed type Capacitor Bank
Each set of 3x100 KVAR fixed type capacitor bank shall consist of the following
components and accessories:
Sl. Description
No.
1. 11kV, 3X100 KVAR capacitor unit with complete set of pole mounting
racks, nuts and bolts.
2. 11kV, 100A Dropout Fused Cutout with Mounting Bracket.
3. 11kV, 25A K-type Fuse Link
4. 11kV, Metal Oxide (ZnO) Lighting Arrester with Mounting Bracket.
5. Capacitor Bank mounting rack complete with necessary Nut, Bolts .
3.6.2 Specification of 11 KV Capacitor Bank
i. Rated System Voltage : 11 KV

ii. Highest system Voltage : 12 KV
iii. System Neutral : Effectively Earthed
iv. Rated Voltage of individual Capacitor: 6.35 KV
v. Rated Capacity of Individual capacitor: 100 KVAR
vi. Capacitor of each three phase Bank : 300 (3 x 100) KVAR
vii. Frequency : 50 Hz
viii. Rated Current : 15.74 Amps
ix. BIL (Full wave, 1.2 x 50 micro sec. : 75 KV (minimum)
wave)
x. Over Voltage rating power frequency : 1.10 times rated voltage
continuously
xi. Transient over current rating : 400 time of rated current (for
4000
transient per year)
xii. Power frequency withstand voltage : 28 KV
(60 seconds) of individual capacitor
xiii. Type of Installation : Outdoor, pole mounted, auto
controlled switched type shunt
Capacitor Banks

xiv. Protection : Fuse Cut-out, Dropout type and

surge
Arrester
xv. Mode of connection : Grounded wye
xvi. Mounting : On Single Pole (SPC, Steel or
Wood Pole)
xvii. Standard : Design, manufacture, testing and
performance shall be in accordance with the latest revision of BS: 1650 or
IEC: 6 0871-1 or equivalent internationally acceptable relevant standards
The capacitor bank shall be supplied with all required mounting structure/racks,
brackets pole bands, bracing angles, nuts, bolts, connections leads etc. i.e.
complete in all respect for installation of SPC, steel or Wood poles. The capacitor
racks shall be designed to hold the capacitors, oil switches, junction boxes etc, as
required.
3.6.4 Construction and Features
i. Capacitor elements shall consist of several layers of insulation film of

adequate thickness and aluminum foil of suitable thickness as electrode and
the element shall be made flat winding of pair of layers.
ii. The insulation polypropylene film used shall be good quality synthetic film of
uniform thickness and shall have high and uniform dielectric strength, low
dielectric losses and shall be free from all electrically harmful components
iii. The internal unit of a Capacitor unit shall be composed of smaller units
connected in series and/or parallel by lead wires and covered by draft paper,
press board.
iv. The internal unit after preliminary drying shall be put in a container,
hermetically sealed and completely dehydrated by means of high vacuum
treatment and impregnated with high grade insulation oil (PXE), without
chorine content special treated purified and degreased for removal of
impurities water.
v. Lugs and shackles shall be provided to enable the capacitor to be fitted and
fixed.
3.6.5 Bushing:
The bushing shall consist of the flat clamp type terminal, porcelain insulator and base
flange. Both the base flange and terminal are soldered to the porcelain and the base
flanges are also soldered to the steel case for complete sealing the bushing shall have
the following characteristic.
(a) Bushing insulation level 18 kV

(b) 50 Hz wet 10 second withstand voltage 4.0 kV
(c) 50 Hz dry one minutes withstand 60 kV
(d) 1.2 X 50 micro sec. impulse withstand voltage 95 crest
(e) Bushing color Sky blue/Brown

3.6.6 Internal Discharge Resistor
Capacitor units shall be provided with built-discharge resistor as a discharge

means for reducing the residual voltage to 50Volts of less within 5 minutes
after the capacitor is disconnected from the supply source to permit safe
handling.
3.6.7 Outside surface of Capacitor case

The container shall be made of stainless steel plate. In order to ensure anti-rusting,
tow layers of anti-rusted paint shall be coated on the outer surface of the
container.
3.6.8 Name Plate
Each Capacitor unit shall be provided with a permanent nameplate, which

includes the following in addition to all standard information.
.i Manufacturers name and country

ii. Serial number
iii. Manufacturers Type, Model, Style & Catalogue number
iv. Date of Manufacture
v. Rated voltage
vi. Rated KVAR Capacity
vii. Number of phase
viii. Rated Frequency
ix. Rated Current
x. Rated BIL
xi. Type of non-flammable insulating liquid used
xii. Weight
The short circuit level of DESCOs 11 kV systems is 350 MVA. The banks shall be
designed to operate under this fault level. The bidder shall suggest the type of fuses
and rated current fuse suitable for protection of the bank and also submit the
calculation of the rated current of fuse to be used for this capacitor bank.
3.7 Technical Specification of Sectionalizing Switch
3.7.1 Specification of 11 KV Off-Load Isolator without Earth Blade
2.1 Standard : Design, Manufacturing, Testing and Performance shall e

in accordance to IEC 947, Part 1 & 2 or equivalent
international standards.
2.2 General
2.2.1 Application : For 11KV Overhead Line/Feeder Isolation
2.2.2 Installation : Outdoor on Pole top
2.2.3 Type : Air
2.2.4 Construction : Open
2.2.5 Operation : Gang
2.2.6 Operating mechanism : Manual

2.2.7 Mounting position : Horizontal on supporting structure

2.2.8 Number of pole : 3 (three)
2.2.9 System frequency : 50 Hz.
2.2.10 System voltage : 11 KV
2.2.11 Maximum System : 12 KV
voltage
2.2.12 Basic Insulation Level : 75KV
2.2.13 Rated Normal current : 400 Amps.
2.2.14 Rated Short time current Minimum 20KA for 3 sec.
Single-break pattern (Horizontal break, centre break), OFF load type.
Chennel mounted base insulator, blast.
Coupling tubes for gang operation and adjustable operating rod with insulating link and
intermediate guide for operating rod.
Auxiliary switch, operated by the phase coupling tube to control circuits for operating
indicators, alarm, electrical inter-locking with the respective breaker to ensure that the isolator
can only be operated when the breaker is in OFF position etc.
Terminal connector suitable for ACSR conductor.
Earthing steel pads with provision for earth lead.
Provision for pad locking in ON & OFF position.
Provision of key interlocking.
Galvanized Nuts, bolts & all accessories for mountings on structures.
Interlocking magnet for electrical interlocking.
All ferrous parts shall be hot dipped galvanized after completion of machining. Galvanizing
shall be in accordance with BS-729.
Operating mechanism shall be fully Insulator of the unit shall be made of porcelain and shall
be suitable to withstand a mechanical force of 1.6 KN.
All movables current carrying contacts shall be silver-plated.
Adjustable brackets shall be provided for steel cross-arm mounting with nuts, bolts, etc for
mounting.
All hardware shall be non-ferrous metal or if ferrous it shall be hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication as per latest revision of BS-729 or equivalent standard. All mounting brackets
shall be provided for steel cross-arm mounting with nuts, bolts, etc.
These shall be provided with latest mechanism, which shall open the fuse element when the
fuse has operated. The latest mechanism shall be constructed to be easily operated from the
ground with the aid of an operating stick. Current carrying goods/material shall be made of
copper alloy.

The fuse element shall be totally enclosed by a fuse holder to protect it from the
atmosphere on specified electrical characteristics of the fuse Units shall be as per IEC-
60282-2.
3.8.1 Information required:
The followings shall be submitted along with the Bid.
(i) Characteristics Curves along with Printed Catalogues describing construction

operation and maintenance guide of offered MCCB, Las and DOFCs, Capacitor
Bank and Off-Load Isolator In case of Fuse Element the manufacturer shall
submit maximum clearing time and minimum melting time curves for fuse link.
(ii) Constructional diagram and dimensions of the offered items.
(iii) Catalogue containing detail technical information of offered MCCBs, LAs,
DOFCs, Capacitor Bank and Off-Load Isolator and type shall be indicated by red
ink.
(iv) Outline dimension & drawings of offered items.
(v) Type Test Reports on offered types MCCBs, LAs and DOFCs, Capacitor Bank
and Off-Load Isolator. These tests shall be from an independent and well-known
testing laboratory like KEMA, CESI, CPRI, CEPRI, PEHLA or any other
internationally accrediated laboratory (accreditation document shall be provided
along with bid).
(vii) At least 2 samples of each category (except Capacitor Bank and Off-Load
Isolator) of the offered equipment shall be supplied with the bid, these samples
are to be returned to the bidder after award of contract.
(viii) All data schedules duly filled up with appropriate technical data;
3.8.3 Packing:
Purchaser.

package.
- Name of supplier.
- Port of Loading.
- Contract Number.
- Measurements.
DESCO
BANGLADESH

The tests, as agreed upon by the purchaser and the supplier, shall be performed as per relevant
IEC/BS Standard or equivalent.
3.8.5 Costs related to inspection and testing
by the purchaser.
Post landing inspection of delivered goods shall be done by a PLI committee of DESCO
inspection shall be intimated to the of Supplier for presence of their representative during the
PLI. The PLI committee in its report shall mention the exact/assessed quantity of goods. The
(ii) Visual Inspection of goods;

(iii) Conformance with approved drawings with respect to dimensions/type/size.
(iv) Quantity of supplied goods.


4.1 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 11KV Lightning
Arrester
Sl Description Requirements Manufacturers

No. Particulars
01 Reference Standard IEC 99-4 or equivalent international
standards unless otherwise specified
herein.
02 Name and address of Shall be mentioned.
Manufacturer
03 Installation Outdoor pole/cross arm

angle/channel/structure mounted.
04 Type/Model Zinc oxide (ZnO)
05 Construction As per relevant IEC standard
06 Application Protection of 11/0.415KV
distribution Transformers.
07 Nominal rated Voltage 11KV
08 Maximum System 12KV
Voltage
09 System Frequency 50Hz
10 Type of System 3Phase with effectively earthed
neutral.
11 Rated Arrester voltage 10KV RMS
12 Class 1
13 Rated Arrester current 10KA (8/20 micro second wave)
14 High current withstand 100KA
15 Pressure relief class 20KA (rms Symmetrical)
16 Basic Insulation level 80KV crest
(BIL) at 1.2/50 micro
sec impulses.
17 Lightning impulse 39KV crest
Residual Voltage at
8/20 micro sec.
Current wave
18 Creepage distance 30mm/KV
19 Weight in Kg. Shall be mentioned
20 Printed Catalogue and Shall be furnished
performance curve.
21 Outline drawing and Shall be furnished
leaflets.
22 Test Certificate Shall be furnished
23 Place of Shall be mentioned
Manufacturing or
Country of Origin
Seal and Signature of the Bidder.

4.2 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 11KV DOF Cut-out

and Fuse Link
(to be filled up by the bidder, otherwise the bid will not be considered for evaluation)
Sl Description Requirements Manufacturers

No. Particulars
01 Reference Standard IEC 282-2 or equivalent
international standards unless
02 Name and address of Shall be mentioned.
Manufacturer
03 Installation Outdoor cross arm angle or channel
or structure mounted on poles.
04 Type/Model Expulsion type.
05 Construction As per relevant IEC standard
06 Application Protection of 11/0.415KV
distribution transformers.
07 Nominal rated Voltage 11KV
08 Maximum System 12KV
Voltage
09 System Frequency 50Hz
10. Type of System 3-Phase with effectively earthed
neutral.
11 Continues current 100.
rating
12 Basic Insulation Level 75KV
(BIL)
13 Power frequency 28KV
withstand voltage
14 Rated interrupting 8KA
capacity
15 Insulator material 1.6 KN
strength.
16 Dimension in Shall be mentioned
maximum
17 Weight in Kg. Shall be mentioned
18 Continues current 50 & 25
rating of fuse link.
19 Fuse link type K-type Shall be furnished
as per NEMA standard
medium melting high
surge) Yes/No.
20 Printed catalogue and Shall be furnished
performance curve.
21 Outline drawing and Shall be furnished
leaflets.
22. Test Certificate Shall be furnished
23. Place of Shall be mentioned.
Manufacturing or
Country of Origin.


400V, 200 Amps, 3-Phase MCCB with Enclosure
Sl Description Required Technical features Manufacturers

No. Particular
1 Standard Shall be in accordance to IEC
947, Part 1 & 2 or equivalent
2 Application For Transformer secondary
and/or feeder protection.
3 Installation Outdoor panel /box mounted.
4 Housing of MCCB Weather proof moulded case
Housing.
5 Frame size 250 AF
6 Rated Operating voltage 415 VAC
7 Maximum system voltage 456 VAC
8 System frequency 50 Hz.
9 Number of Poles 3 (three), for three-phase
operation.
10 Rated continuous current 200 Amperes.
11 Interrupting current Minimum 40KA, RMS
symmetrical at 415 VAC
under standard duty cycle.
12 Operating condition The climatic conditions as
specified below:
The climate is humid and
tropical. Maximum humidity
and temperature occur
simultaneously. Relative
humidity 100% maximum.
Altitude less than 300 meters
above sea level. Ambient
temperature variation +3 to 45
degree Celsius.
13 Operating Mechanism Quick make, quick break type,
mechanically trip free
indicator for ON- TRIP-OFF
position. Must be equipped
with push to Trip button in
front of Breaker.
14 Trip Micro Processor Based
Electronic/Mechanical Trip
Unit.
Magnetic Adjustable: Magnetic
element setting provision for
short circuit protection variable
from 400% to 1000%.
Thermal Adjustable Thermal
time delay overload protection
variable from 40% to 100%.
15 Construction of MCCB Contract shall be made of
silver alloy bolted terminal for

front wire on entry from top

and bottom. The unit shall be
weather proof, dust proof and
tropicalized, toggle switch for
ON OFF. Appropriate
design grid arc quenchers to
make it safe at highest
interrupting duty.
Enclosure
16 Standards Performance, design and
testing shall be in accordance
to latest revision of British or
IEC standard except as
specified herein.
17 Construction of Enclosure The enclosure shall be made of
polymeric housing of Gray or
Black colour with minimum
thickness 3.0 mm.
The enclosures shall have

hinged type front door with a
cylindrical built-in-lock. The
enclosure shall be rain, dust
and weather proof in
accordance to IP54. The
design & material used for the
enclosure must be shockproof
and fire retardant.
18 Features of Enclosure The Outdoor type enclosure
shall be provided with
adequate means for outdoor
pole mounting and shall be
supplied complete with all
necessary fitting facilities by
clamping or stainless steel
strap & buckles arrangement
with Poles.
The unit shall have slanted

roof and rain shed for
Outdoors type. The unit shall
have bottom entry for
incoming of 95 sq. mm PVC
insulated, PVC sheathed
Copper cable through rubber
glands.
Main parts must be protected

from water. Terminal shall be
complete with bolts and
suitable for accommodate
compression type copper
connectors for 95 to 120 sq.
mm cable. The connectors so
required also are supplied

along with the MCCBs.
The following designations

shall be printed on the front
door as follows:
200A MCCB
400 Volts
Sl. No.


400V, 400 Amps, 3-Phase MCCB with Enclosure
Sl Description Required Technical features Manufacturers

No. Particular
1 Standard Shall be in accordance with
IEC 947, Part 1 & 2 or
equivalent international
standards.
2 Application For Transformer secondary
and/or feeder protection.
3 Installation Outdoor panel /box mounted.
4 Housing of MCCB Weather proof moulded case
Housing.
5 Frame size 400 AF
6 Rated Operating voltage 415 VAC
7 Maximum system voltage 456 VAC
8 System frequency 50 Hz.
9 Number of Poles 3 (three), for three-phase
operation.
10 Rated continuous current 400 Amperes.
11 Interrupting current Minimum 40KA, RMS
symmetrical at 415 VAC
under standard duty cycle.
12 Operating condition The climatic conditions as
specified below:
The climate is humid and
tropical. Maximum humidity
and temperature occur
simultaneously. Relative
humidity 100% maximum.
Altitude less than 300 meters
above sea level. Ambient
temperature variation +3 to 45
degree Celsius.
13 Operating Mechanism Quick make, quick break type,
mechanically trip free
indicator for ON- TRIP-OFF
position. Must be equipped
with push to Trip button in
front of Breaker.
14 Trip Micro Processor Based
Electronic/Mechanical Trip
Unit.
Magnetic Adjustable: Magnetic
short circuit protection variable
from 400% to 1000%.
Thermal Adjustable Thermal
time delay overload protection
variable from 40% to 100%.
15 Construction of MCCB Contract shall be made of

silver alloy bolted terminal for

front wire on entry from top
and bottom. The unit shall be
weather proof, dust proof and
tropicalized, toggle switch for
ON OFF. Appropriate
design grid arc quenchers to
make it safe at highest
interrupting duty.
Enclosure
16 Standards Performance, design and
testing shall be in accordance
to latest revision of British or
IEC standard except as
specified herein.
17 Construction of Enclosure The enclosure shall be made of
polymeric housing of Gray or
Black colour with minimum
thickness 3.0 mm.
The enclosures shall have

hinged type front door with a
cylindrical built-in-lock. The
enclosure shall be rain, dust
and weather proof in
accordance to IP54. The
design & material used for the
enclosure must be shockproof
and fire retardant.
18 Features of Enclosure The Outdoor type enclosure
shall be provided with
adequate means for outdoor
pole mounting and shall be
supplied complete with all
necessary fitting facilities by
clamping or stainless steel
strap & buckles arrangement
with Poles.
The unit shall have slanted

roof and rain shed for
Outdoors type. The unit shall
have bottom entry for
incoming of 95 sq. mm PVC
insulated, PVC sheathed
Copper cable through rubber
glands.
Main parts must be protected

from water. Terminal shall be
complete with bolts and
suitable for accommodate
compression type copper
connectors for 95 to 120 sq.
mm cable. The connectors so

required also are supplied

along with the MCCBs.
The following designations

shall be printed on the front
door as follows:
400A MCCB
400 Volts
Sl. No.
Seal and Signature of the Bidder..

4.5 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 11KV OFF-LOAD Isolator

300A without Earth blade
Sl Description Unit Required Technical Manufacturers

No. features Particular
1 Standard Shall be in accordance to

IEC-129 or equivalent
2 Name & address of the To be mentioned by the
Manufacture bidder
3 Manufacturers Model To be mentioned by the
bidder
4 Type Air
5 Installation Outdoor on pole top
6 Construction Open on steel strcture and
porecelin insulator
7 Operation Gang
8 Operating Mechnism Manual
9 Mounting position Horizontal
10 Number of Pole Nos. 3 (three)
11 System frequency Hz 50
13 Maximum System KV 12
Voltage
14 Rated Normal Current A 400
15 Rated short time current KA 20 KA for 3 sec.
16 Basic Insulation Level KV 75
(BIL)
17 No of break per pole Nos. To be mentioned by the
bidder
18 Type of contact Nos. To be mentioned by the
bidder
Seal and Signature of the Bidder..

5. Drawings

Lot-5 of Package-2
Supply of Conductors, Conductor Accessories, Insulators and
Insulator Accessories

Contents
1. List of Goods and Related Services......................................................................................... 6-156

4. Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule.6-180
5. Drawings................................................................................................................................. 6-205

Lot No.: Lot-5 of Package-2

Lot Name: Supply of Conductors, Conductor Accessories,
Insulators and Insulator Accessories
ment
Group1: Conductors and Conductor Accessories
Conductor & Transformer Loop:
01 Supply & Delivery of: ACSR merline 300 Km
02 Supply & Delivery of: ACSR DOG 500 Km
03 Supply & Delivery of: ACSR Rabbit 250 Km
04 Supply & Delivery of: AAC WASP (Ins) 750 Km
05 Supply & Delivery of: AAC ANT (Ins) 650 Km
Service Wire:
06 Supply & Delivery of: 95 Sq. mm Single Core NYY Cable 75 Km
07 Supply & Delivery of: 35 Sq. mm 3.5XC NYY Cable 15 Km
08 Supply & Delivery of: 25 Sq. mm Self Supported Quadruplex 50 Km
Service Cable
Service Cable
Service Cable
11 Supply & Delivery of: 6 Sq. mm Self Supported duplex Service 750 Km
Cable
Tension Type Compression
Connectors:
12 Supply & Delivery of: Mid-Span Joint for ACSR Merlin 200 Nos.
13 Supply & Delivery of: Mid-Span Joint for ACSR Dog 400 Nos.
14 Supply & Delivery of: Mid-Span Joint for ACSR Rabbit 200 Nos.
15 Supply & Delivery of: Mid-Span Joint for AAC WASP (Ins) 600 Nos.
16 Supply & Delivery of: Mid-Span Joint for AAC ANT (Ins) 300 Nos.
Non-Tension type Compression
connectors:
17 Supply & Delivery of: Repair Sleev for ACSR Merlin 100 Nos.
18 Supply & Delivery of: Repair Sleev for ACSR DOG 200 Nos.
19 Supply & Delivery of: Repair Sleev for ACSR Rabbit 150 Nos.
20 Supply & Delivery of: Repair Sleev for ACSR WASP (Ins) 300 Nos.
21 Supply & Delivery of: Repair Sleev for AAC ANT (Ins) 200 Nos.
Non-Tension Compression (H-type)
Connectors
22 Supply & Delivery of: 170/170 Sq. mm for ACSR Merlin/Merlin 750 Nos.
23 Supply & Delivery of: 100/100 sq.mm for ACSR DOG/DOG 15000 Nos.
24 Supply & Delivery of: H-type connector 100/50 sq.mm for 2000 Nos.
ACSR DOG/Rabbit


ment
25 Supply & Delivery of: 50/50 Sq.mm for ACSR Rabbit/Rabbit 1500 Nos.
26 Supply & Delivery of: 100/100 Sq.mm for AAC WASP/WASP 112500 Nos.
with PVC
27 Supply & Delivery of: 100/50 Sq.mm for AAC WASP/ANT 5000 Nos.
with PVC cover
28 Supply & Delivery of: 50/50 Sq.mm for AAC ANT/ANT with 5000 Nos.
PVC cover
29 Supply & Delivery of: 100/25 sq.mmsuitable for bi-metalicuse to 112500 Nos.
AAC
30 Supply & Delivery of: 50/25 sq.mmsuitable for bi-metalicuse to 4000 Nos.
AAC ANT/bare
31 Supply & Delivery of: Bi-Metallic Service Bail 53200 Nos.
32 Supply & Delivery of: Aluminium Binding Wire 30000 Meters
33 Supply & Delivery of: Wedge Clamp 7500 Nos.
34 Supply & Delivery of: 6.6 mm Line Tap/split Bolt Connectors 75000 Nos.
35 Supply & Delivery of: 11.17 mm Line Tap/split Bolt Connectors 400000 Nos.
Non-Tension Type PG Clamp:
36 Supply & Delivery of: P.G. Clamp(100/100) Sq.mm 1064 Nos.
39 Supply & Delivery of: Copper Lug 100(95) sq.mm 25000 Nos.
40 Supply & Delivery of: Copper Lug 70(50) sq.mm 5000 Nos.
Group2: Insulator and Insulator Accessories:
41 Supply & Delivery of: 11 KV Pin Insulator with Pin 60000 Nos.
42 Supply & Delivery of: 11 KV Tension Disc 40000 Nos.
43 Supply & Delivery of: 11KV Tension Set with Accessories 20000 Sets
(Anchor Shackle-1 No., Ball Eye1No.,
Socket Eye1 No., and Strain Clam 1
No.)
44 Supply & Delivery of: LV Shackle Insulator 200000 Nos.

Required
No. of Goods or
Completion
Date for
Related
Services
Port of Entry
for Goods
offered from
270 days
outside the
counting
Purchasers
from 21
Country and
days after
Ex-Works for
issuance of
Goods offered
CL.
from within the
Purchasers
country.
Group1: Conductors and Conductor Accessories
Conductor &
Transformer Loop:
01 ACSR merline 300 Km
02 ACSR DOG 500 Km
03 ACSR Rabbit 250 Km
04 AAC WASP (Ins) 750 Km
05 AAC ANT (Ins) 650 Km
Service Wire:
06 95 Sq. Mm Single Core 75 Km
NYY Cable
07 35 Sq. mm 3.5XC NYY 15 Km
Cable
08 25 Sq. mm Self Supported 50 Km
Quadruplex Service Cable
duplex Service Cable

Tension Type
Compression Connectors:
12 Mid-Span Joint for ACSR 200
Merlin Nos.
Dog Nos.
Rabbit Nos.
15 Mid-Span Joint for AAC 600
WASP (Ins) Nos.
16 Mid-Span Joint for AAC 300
ANT (Ins) Nos.
Non-Tension type
Compression connectors:
17 Repair Sleev for ACSR 100
Merlin Nos.
DOG Nos.
Rabbit Nos.
WASP (Ins) Nos.
21 Repair Sleev for AAC ANT 200
(Ins) Nos.
Non-Tension
Compression (H-type)
Connectors
22 170/170 Sq. mm for ACSR 750
Merlin/Merlin Nos.
23 100/100 sq.mm for ACSR 15000
DOG/DOG Nos.
24 H-type connector 100/50 2000
sq.mm for ACSR Nos.
DOG/Rabbit
25 50/50 Sq.mm for ACSR 1500
Rabbit/Rabbit Nos.
26 100/100 Sq.mm for AAC 112500
WASP/WASP with PVC Nos.
27 100/50 Sq.mm for AAC 5000
WASP/ANT with PVC Nos.
cover
28 50/50 Sq.mm for AAC 5000
ANT/ANT with PVC cover Nos.
29 100/25 sq.mmsuitable for 112500
bi-metalicuse to AAC Nos.
30 50/25 sq.mmsuitable for bi- 4000
metalicuse to AAC Nos.
ANT/bare
31 Bi-Metallic Service Bail 53200
Nos.
32 Aluminium Binding Wire 30000
Meters
33 Wedge Clamp 7500
Nos.

34 6.6 mm Line Tap/split Bolt 75000

Connectors Nos.
35 11.17 mm Line Tap/split 400000
Bolt Connectors Nos.
Non-Tension Type PG
Clamp:
36 P.G. Clamp(100/100) 1064
Sq.mm Nos.
37 P.G. Clamp(100/50) Sq.mm 500
Nos.
38 P.G. Clamp(50/50) Sq.mm 100
Nos.
39 Copper Lug 100(95) sq.mm 25000
Nos.
40 Copper Lug 70(50) sq.mm 5000
Nos.
Group2: Insulators and Insulator Accessories
41 11 KV Pin Insulator with 60000
Pin Nos.
42 11 KV Tension Disc 40000
Nos.
43 11KV Tension Set with 20000
Accessories (Anchor Sets
Shackle-1 No., Ball Eye
1No., Socket Eye1 No.,
and Strain Clam 1 No.)
44 LV Shackle Insulator 200000
Nos.

Table of Contents

3.1 General 6-158
3.4 Conductors and Conductor Accessories
3.4.1 Technical Specification of ACSR Conductors 6-159
3.4.1.1 General 6-159
3.4.1.2 Standards 6-160
3.4.1.3 Information Required 6-160
3.4.2 Technical Specification of AAC Inuslated Conductors 6-160
3.4.2.1 General 6-160
3.4.2.2 Standards 6-161
3.4.2.3 Required Information 6-161
3.4.3 Technical Specification of 600/1000 V 3.5X35 sq.mm & 6-161
1X95 sq.mm NYY Cables
3.4.3.1 General 6-161
3.4.3.2 Standards 6-162
3.4.3.3 Information Required 6-162
3.4.4 Technical Specification 600/100 V Self-Supported 6-163
Mutiplex Cables
3..4.4.1 General 6-163
3.4.4.2 Standards 6-164
3.4.4.3 Information required 6-164
3.4.5 Compression Type Connectors 6-164
3.4.5.1 Size of Connectors for ACSR Merlin, DOG & Rabbit and 6-165
AAC WASP, ANT
3.4.6 Mid Span Tension Type Compression Joints 6-165
3.4.6.1 Minimum Length 6-165
3.4.6.2 Repair Sleeve, Non-Tension Compression Type 6-166
3.4.6.3 Split Bolt Connector/Line Tap 6-166
3.4.6.4 Bi-metalic Service Bail 6-166
3.4.6.5 Terminal Lugs for 100 (85) & 70 (50) sq.mm NYY Cable 6-166
3.4.6.6 Aluminium Binding Wire 6-166
3.4.6.7 Wedge Clamp 6-167
3.4.6.8 P.G. Clamp 6-167
3. 5 Insulators and Insulator Accessories
3.5.1 11 KV Pin Insulator with Pins 6-168
3.5.1.1 Technical Specification 6-168
3.5.1.2 Construction 6-169
3.5.2 11 KV Tension Disc Set 6-169
3.5.2.1 Technical Specification 6-169
3.5.2.2 Specification of 11 KV Tension Disc fittings 6-170
3.5.2.3 Construction of 11 KV Tension Disc fittings 6-171
3.5.2.4 Technical Spcification of LV Shackle Insulator 6-171
3.5.2.5 Construction of LV Shackle Insulator 6-171

4.1 Documents 6-172

4.2 Apporval of Drawings 6-172

4.3 Packing 6-172
4.5 Post Landing Inspection 6-174
5.0 Guranteed Technical Data Schedule for
5.1 ACSR Merlin 6-175
5.2 ACSR DOG 6-177
5.3 ACSR Rabbit 6-179
5.4 AAC WASP (Ins) 6-181
5.5 AAC ANT (Ins) 6-183
5.6 1-Core, 95 sq.mm NYY Cables 6-185
5.7 3.5 Core, 35 sq.mm NYY Cables 6-186
5.8 6 rm self supported duplex Conductor 6-187
5.9 10 rm self supported quadruplex Conductor 6-189
5.12 11 KV Pin Insulator with Pins 6-195
5.13 11 KV Tension Disc 6-197
5.14 11 KV Strain Set 6-199
5.15 LV Shackle Insulator 6-200

3.1 General

appropriate specified standard has been issued and is acceptable to the Purchaser, any
material or equipment supplied shall be manufactured, installed and tested in
accordance with the latest revision of the relevant standard unless otherwise specified.
Where any Standard referred to in this Specification has been superseded by a new
standard prior to the date of the letter or invitation to bid, the reference shall be
deemed to be to such superseding standard.
Deviations from this Specification or standards referred to above shall be given in the
Bid and shall be accepted by the Purchaser before contract placement.
The works shall be designed to ensure continuity of service under all working
condition at the site as the first consideration and to facilitate inspection, maintenance
and repairs. All reasonable precautions shall be taken in the design of equipment and
of the works, to ensure the safety of personnel concerned with the operation and
maintenance of the works.
All equipment supplied shall be designed and be of such quality as to require the
minimum or maintenance during service.
Corresponding parts of similar equipment, and equipment liable to renewal, shall be

fully interchangeable and the Contractor will be required to demonstrate this feature
to the Purchasers satisfaction.
All equipment shall operate without under vibration and with the least practical
amount of noise.
All electrical components shall be adequately rated for their most onerous duty and
the specified ambient temperature. When equipment is mounted in panels, cubicles
etc., due account shall be taken of any heat generated by the equipment therein and
the components shall be appropriately selected, rated or de-rated as necessary to suit
the most onerous operating temperatures within the enclosure.
3.2 References
this demonstration are deemed included in the Contractors bid Prices.

The offered Distribution Transformers shall be suitable for working in the climate conditions
of Bangladesh as described below:

Humidity : 98%
3.4 Conductors and Conductor Accessories
3.4.1 Technical Specifications of ACSR Conductors
3.4.1.1 General
These conductors shall be designed as per following standards for operation in overhead lines
in air under local ambient conditions.
The maximum acceptable length of conductor in a drum shall be as stated below and shall be
supplied on standard non-returnable wooden drum, each drum having stenciled on each side,
drum number, codename of conductor, drum wound length together with gross and net weight
and the manufacturer name and contract number.
ACSR Merlin ACSR DOG ACSR Rabbit

Standard Performance Design and Testing shall be in accordance to
the BS, IEC, VDE or equivalent International standards.
Installation Overhead
Type Standard
Material Hard drawn Aluminum steel re-inforced
Overall diameter 17.35mm 14.15mm 10.05mm
Number/diameter of Aluminum 18/3.47mm 6/4.72mm 6/3.35mm
Nominal cross sectional area of 179.68sq.mm 118.47 sq.mm 61.67 sq.mm
conductors
Nominal Aluminum cross 170.22sq.mm 104.93 sq.mm 52.85 sq.mm
sectional area
Number/diameter of Steel 1/3.47mm 7/1.57mm 1/3.35mm
Nominal Steel cross sectional 9.46sq.mm 13.56 sq.mm 8.82 sq.mm
area
Weight of conductor 543Kg/km 394Kg/Km 214Kg/KM
Code name Merlin DOG Rabbit
Drum wound length 1000 M 1700 M 2200 M
Maximum DC Resistance of 0.169/Km 0.2733 /Km 0.5426 /Km
Conductor at 20 deg.C
Minimum breaking Load of 3926 Kg 3335Kg 1871Kg
Conductor

3.4.1.2 Standards:
Design, Manufacture, Testing and performance shall be in accordance to latest revision of BS

215; Part-1, 1970; BS 6485; 1971, BS 6746; 1984, BS 2627; 1970, ASTM-B 232; 1974 and
BDS 1037; 1983 or equivalent International standard.
Drum wound length shall vary up to +/-5% of the total length specified above as tolerance.
However, the total length shall be as per ordered quantity. There shall be only one short
length of conductor on a drum considered for acceptance. For the other requirement the given
data shall be considered as minimum and maximum where necessary. No negative tolerances
in lieo of diameters are acceptable.
3.4.1.3 Information Required:
The manufacturer shall furnish sufficient information, which will consist of but not limited to
the following:
o D.C resistance of the conductor at 20 degree centigrade in /Km

o Weigh of cable in Kg/Km.
o Continuous current rating at ambient (air) temperature of 45 degree centigrade.
o Reactance /Km at 50 Hz.
o Breaking load of conductor in Kg.
3.4.2 Specifications of AAC Insulated Conductors

3.4.2.1 General
These conductors shall be designed as per following standards for operation in overhead lines
in air under local ambient conditions.
A means of identifying the voltage grads and DESCO ownership shall be inscribed
throughout the length of the Conductors in two lines on the PVC Insulation. The letters shall
be upright block characters embossed on the surface, there being not more than 300mm
between each group.
The maximum acceptable length of conductor in a drum shall be as stated below and shall be
supplied on standard non-returnable wooden drum, each drum having stencilled on each side,
drum number, codename of conductor, drum wound length together with gross and net weight
and the manufacturer name and contract number.
AAC WASP (Insulated) AAC ANT (Insulated)

Standard Performance Design and Testing shall be in accordance to
the BS, IEC, VDE or equivalent International standards.
Installation Overhead
Type Standard
Material Hard drawn Alumonium
Overall diameter 15.57mm 13.74mm
Diameter of bare conductor 13.17mm 11.34mm
Number/diameter of 7/4.39mm 7/3.10mm
Alumonium

Nominal cross sectional area 106.00sq.mm 52.84 sq.mm

of conductors
Insulation thickness (min.) 0.8mm 0.8mm
Co lour of Insulation Black Black
Weight of bare conductor 290Kg/Km 145Kg/Km
Weight of insulated 420Kg/Km 215Kg/Km
conductor
Code name WASP ANT
Drum wound length 1300 M 2200 M
Gross weight Shall be in Kg Shall be in Kg
Maximum DC Resistance of 0.2702 /Km 0.5419 /Km
Conductor at 20 deg.C
Minimum breaking Load of 1632Kg 845Kg
Conductor
3.4.2.2 Standards:
Design, Manufacture, Testing and performance shall be in accordance to latest revision of BS

215; Part-1, 1970; BS 6485; 1971, BS 6746; 1984, BS 2627; 1970, ASTM-B 232; 1974 and
BDS 1036; 1983 or equivalent International standard.
in lieo of diameter of conductors and thickness of insulations are acceptable.
3.4.2.3 Required information:
the following:

o Description of Insulation and thickness of Insulation.
3.4.3 Specifications of 600/100V 3.5X35 sq.mm & 1X 95 sq.mm

NYY Cables
3.4.3.1 General
The prospective cable is to supply 600/1000V, 3.5X35 sq.mm & 1X 95 sq.mm, PVC (Cu).
The detail technical specification is given as under.
These cables shall be as per IEC 502 and suitable for operation at a maximum voltage of
1000V line to line and suitable for use underground buried in earth or in ducts, and above
ground in air or in buildings under local ambient conditions.
The maximum acceptable length of cable on a drum shall be 1000M and it shall be shipped on
standard non-returnable wooden drum, each drum having stenciled on each side, drum

number, codename of conductor, drum wound length together with gross and net weight and
the manufacturer name and contract number.
Thickness of insulation shall be in accordance with IEC 502. The over sheath shall be an
external layer of black PVC.
A means of identifying the voltage grads and DESCO ownership shall be inscribed throughout
the length of the cable in two lines diametrically opposite on the sheath. The letters shall be
upright block characters embossed on the surface, there being not more than 300mm between
each group.
The manufacturers name shall be provided throughout the length of the cable with year of
manufacturer.
Description Unit Requirements

Cable Size Sq.mm 1CX95 3.5CX35
Material PVC Insulated plain annealed
copper.
Numbers & Diameter of wires mm 19/2.52 20/1.71+7/1.71
Maximum resistance at 30 deg.C /Km 0.1964 0.5446/1.1850
Nominal thickness of insulation mm 1.6 1.2/1.0
Nominal thickness of sheath mm 1.8 2.0
Colour of sheath Black Black
Approximate outer diameter mm 19.4 28.40
Approximate weight Kg/Km 1129 2147
Continuous permissible service V 600/1000 600/1000
voltage
Current rating at 30 deg.C ambient Amps 270 130
temperature U/G
Current rating at 35 deg.C ambient in Amps 300 120
air
3.4.3.2 Standards:
Design, Manufacture, Testing and performance shall be in accordance to latest revision of BS,
IEC, VDE or equivalent International standard.
Cable construction shall be as per BS 6004:1994 or equivalent to any internationally

acceptable standard.
3.4.3.3 Information Reqired:
the following:


o Description of conductor insulation and thickness in mm.

3.4.4 Technical Specifications of 600/1000V Self-Supported

Multiplex Cables
3.4.4.1 General
The prospective cable is to supply 600/1000V 6, 10, 16 & 25 sq.mm, Duplex and Quadruplex
Cables. The detail technical specification is given as under.
These cables shall be as per IEC 502 and suitable for operation at a maximum voltage of
1000V line to line and suitable for use above ground in air or in buildings under local ambient
conditions.
The maximum acceptable length of cable on a drum shall be 1000M and it shall be shipped on
standard non-returnable wooden drum, each drum having stenciled on each side, drum
number, codename of conductor, drum wound length together with gross and net weight and
the manufacturer name and contract number.
Thickness of insulation shall be in accordance with IEC 502.
A means of identifying the voltage grads and DESCO ownership shall be inscribed
throughout the length of the cable on insulation cover. The letters shall be upright block
characters embossed on the surface, there being not more than 300mm between each group.
The manufacturers name shall be provided throughout the length of the cable with year of
manufacturer.
Description Requirement
Installation : Outdoor overhead, high humid, rainfall and temperature
Type : Self supported, weather proof PVC insulated, 3-phase, 4-wire
and 1-phase, 2-wire Duplex and Quadruplex cable.
Voltage Class : 600/1000V
Number of Core : Single
Cable construction : Each single core cable spirally arrange to from a self supporting
assembly without any cover having minimum pitch of 25mm
Conductor Material
Phase Conductor : Plain annealed copper conductor
Neutral Conductor : Hard drawn copper conductor
Insulation Material : High quality electric grade weather proof PVC over core for
water tightness but ensuring case of stripping
Co lour
Phase conductor : Black
Neutral conductor : Green
Insulation Thickness : 1.6mm minimum.,
Sheath : None
mm 2X6 Duplex 4X10 4X16 4X25
Quadruplex Quadruplex quadruplex
DC Resistance of 3.303 1.810 1.140 0.722
Each core at 20C
(maximum) in
Ohm/Km

Cable Diameter mm 12.70 18.50 21.00 24.40

Approximate weight Kg/ 181.00 535.00 792.00 1168.00
Km
Current rating at A 45 56 75 98
35C ambient
temperatura
Number of Conductor Number of strand/ Cross sectional Area in sq.mm

Diameter in mm
Phase Neutral Phase Neutral Phase Neutral
1 1 7/1.05 7/1.05 6 6
3 1 7/1.35 7/1.35 10 10
3 1 7/1.71 7/1.71 16 16
3 1 7/2.14 7/2.14 25 26
3.4.4.2 Standards:
Design, Manufacture, Testing and performance shall be in accordance to latest revision of BS,
IEC, VDE or equivalent International standard.
Conductor construction shall be as per BS 6004:1994 or equivalent to any internationally

acceptable standard.
3.4.4.3 Information Required:
the following:
o Mechanical design: Service drop span shall not exceed 30 meter and maximum tension
of 20% of breaking strength or 250Kg which ever is less with 120Km per hour cross
wind at 5 degree shall not exceeded.
o Weigh of conductor in Kg/Km.
o Description of conductor insulation and thickness in mm.
o Breaking load of conductor in Kg
3.4.5 Compression type Connectors:
The compression type connector will be used for connecting the ACSR Conductors to ACSR
Conductors, AAC Conductors to AAC Conductors and Copper Conductors to AAC
conductors. These should be suitable for Uni-metal and Bi-metal use according to the
constructions and applications of such connectors.

These should be made from high conductivity aluminium and or Alloy, if necessary and pre-
filled with oxide inhabiting compound. The design of the compression type connectors should
be such that galvanic corrosion is minimized. Conductor rough & tooling shall be clearly
joined on the connectors.
3.4.5.1 The size of the connectors for ACSR Merlin, DOG & Rabbit and AAC WASP, ANT is
as follows:
Grove A Grove B
Max Min Max (sq.mm) Min (sq.mm) Length in mm
(sq.mm) (sq.mm)
ACSR 170 170
Merlin/Merlin
ACSR DOG/DOG 100 100
ACSR DOG/Rabbit 100 50
ACSR 50 50
Rabbit/Rabbit
AAC 100 100
WASP/WASP
AAC WASP/ANT 100 50
AAC ANT/ANT 50 50
AAC
WASP/Service Bail
AAC ANT/Service
Bail
Drawing along with detail dimension is enclosed at the drawing section.
3.4.6 Mid Span Tension Type Compression Joints:
Compression type Mid Span Joints shall be used in the overhead lines with ACSR Merlin,
DOG & Rabbit and AAC WASP (I) & ANT (I) Conductors for full tension, comprising of
inner steel sleeve for ACSR conductor, these inner sleeve along with outer aluminium alloy
sleeve capable of taking full tension applied on conductor.
3.4.6.1 Minimum Length of Mid Spain Joints arc as follows:
Aluminium Steel Sleeve
Merlin 570mm 140mm

DOG 490mm 120mm
Rabbit 300mm 100mm
WASP 320 mm Nil
ANT 270 mm Nil
These mid span joints shall be designed to develop 95% of the full rated breaking strength of
the conductor on which they are fitted. Drawing along with detail dimension is enclosed at the
drawing section.

3.4.6.2 Repair Sleeve, Non-Tension Compression Type:
Compression type Repair Sleeves shall be used in Overhead lines with ACSR Merlin, DOG &
rabbit and AAC WASP(I) & ANT(I) withstanding of load of aluminium portion, comprising
of aluminium alloy sleeve capable of total load of repaired conductor tension.
Minimum Length of Repair Sleeves is as follows:
Merlin Aluminium: 300mm

DOG Aluminium : 250mm
Rabbit Aluminium: 220 mm
WASP (I) Aluminum: 250mm
ANT (I) Aluminium: 220mm
For insulated ANT (I) & WASP (I) full length of sleeve to be provided with 0.8mm thick
PVC Covering. Drawing along with detail dimension is enclosed at the drawing section
3.4.6.3 Split Bolt Connector/Line Tap:
Shall be made of tinned copper/brass and suitable to accommodate 25 sq.mm solid copper rod
in the upper grove and in the other grove size shall be (i) 4.3 mm to 6.6 mm dia & (ii) 7.3mm
to 11.17mm dia. Drawing along with detail dimension is enclosed at the drawing section.
3.4.6.4 Bi-metallic Service Bail:
Design, Manufacture, Testing and Performance shall be in accordance to latest revisions of

BS, IEC, VDE or equivalent International Standard. Service bail shall be from hard drawn
Copper and Aluminium wire. The sizes of Copper & Aluminium wire is 25 sq.mm cross
sectional area. Welding process, where both the materials are melted and form bi-metal, shall
do formation of bi-metallic service bail. This Service bail shall be finally covered by PVC
insulation of thickness 1.6mm minimum. Drawing along with detail dimension is enclosed at
the drawing section.
3.4.6.5 Terminal Lugs for 100 (95) & 70 (50) sq.mm NYY Cable:
Design, Manufacture, Testing and Performance shall be in accordance to latest revisions of

BS, IEC, VDE or equivalent International Standard. Terminal Lugs shall be heavily tinned
high purity copper of the compression type prefiled with compound and suitable for
connection of stranded copper conductor to bolts up to 12mm dia.
site as d first consideration and to facilitate inspection, maintenance and repairs. All
the safety of personnel concerned with the operation and maintenance of the works. Drawing
along with detail dimension is enclosed at the drawing section.
3.4.6.6 Aluminium Binding Wire:
General:
Aluminium binding wire is required for binding of AAC and ACSR conductors in insulators.
The Aluminium binding wire shall be solid and bare.

Specification:
General Routine Tie Wire

Type & Materials Solid, Aluminium alloy annealed soft.
Nominal Size of wire 4.14
Cross Sectional area 13.5 sq.mm
Strand Single
3.4.6.7 Wedge Clamp:
General:
Wedge clamp shall be used for mounting of self supported service cable between overhead
line poles and to the service pipe of the consumer. The service cable shall be gripped in such a
way that any tension applied on the cable will be tightened. This item shall be designed in
accordance with latest revision of BS or equivalent standard. The main part (inner and
mounting rope) of this item is constructed by stainless steel wire & sheet and the supporting
part (outer) shall be by aluminium alloy. As a result, this item shall not be rusted in outside
use.
Overall length of the Wedge Clam : 350 mm

Size of the stainless steel wire rope : 3 mm
Length of outer casing : 87 mm
3.4.6.8 P.G. Clamp
General:
Non-Tension type Parallel groove clamp (PG Clamp) shall be used for over head ACSR and
AAC (Insulated) conductors for the purpose of jumper/section jointing of such conductors.
Performance, design & testing shall be in accordance to latest version of BS or equivalent
standard. The PG clamp shall be made of Aluminium Alloy, adequately design body, suitable
for jumpering & loop connections. Following are the sizes of the PG Clamps are intended in
this bidding:
Name of the P.G. Groove-A Groove-B Dimension of PG No. of

Clamps suitable for (groove dia (groove dia Clam M-10
Conductors: min. in mm) min. in mm) Bolt.
L (mm) W (mm)
ACSR DOG/DOG & 14.15 14.15 95 30 2
AAC
WASP(I)/WASP(I)
ACSR DOG/Rabbit & 14.15 10.05 95 30 2
AAC WASP(I)
/ANT(I)
ACSR Rabbit/Rabbit 10.05 10.05 80 22 2
& AAC ANT(I)
/ANT(I)

3.5 Insulators and Insulator Accessories
3.5.1 11KV Pin Insulator with Pins
3.5.1.1 Technical Specifications of 11KV Pin Insulator with Pins
Sl. Description of items Required Specifications

No.
I Installation Outdoor, Overhead cross
arm mounted on the line.
Ii Nominal system voltage (line to Line) 11KV
Iii Maximum system voltage (line to Line) 12KV
Iv Type of system 3-phase, 50 Hz, 3-wire
effectively earthed.
V Insulator Voltage Class 15KV
Vi Insulator materials Wet process porcelain brown
glazed
vii Minimum Creepage distance 298mm
viii Minimum withstand voltage (1 minute)
Power Frequency (Dry) 70KV
Power Frequency (Wet) 50KV
Ix Impulse withstand Voltage (1.2X50 micro sec. wave) 110KV
X Minimum Power Frequency Flashover (Dry) 80KV
Xi Minimum Power Frequency Flashover (Wet) 55KV
xii 50% Impulse Flashover 1.2X50micro sec. Wave 115KV
positive
xiii 50% Impulse Flashover 1.2X50micro sec. Wave 140KV
negative
xiv Power Frequency Puncher Voltage 130KV
Xv Minimum Dry Arching Distance 133mm
xvi Power Frequency Test Voltage RMS to ground 15KV
xvii Minimum Radio Influence Voltage (RIV) at 1000kc As per BS 137.2
in micro volt
xviii Minimum Neck Diameter 76mm
xix Minimum Diameter of Insulator 150mm
Xx Minimum height of the insulator 150mm
xxi Minimum Grove diameter 22mm
xxii Minimum Mechanical failing load 10KN

3.5.1.2 Construction of 11KV Pin Insulator and Pin

Insulator shall be made of good commercial grade wet process porcelain. The porcelain shall
be sound, thoroughly verified and free from laminations, defects and blemishes, which might
adversely affect the life of the Insulator. The exposed parts of the porcelain shall be smoothly
glazed and shall be brown in colour unless otherwise specified.
Insulator head shall have tie wire groove guiding groove for line conductor of diameter from
9.3mm to 14.2mm for 11KV. The head shall have white glazed and be brown in colour unless
The pin shall be line type tapered style with threaded shank made of forged steel, galvanized
complete with nut, lock-nut and thick washer for use in steel cross arm of 10mm thick.
Pin steel head shall be suitable for screwing in to thimble fixed in the insulator pinhole.
Minimum thread length shall be 44.00 mm for 11KV Pin Insulators.
Pin stalk length shall be 229mm for 11KV respectively measured above seating face of the
collar.
Shank length of the 11KV Pins shall be minimum 50.00mm measured below seating face of
the collar and shank diameter shall be 22mm, threaded length shall be minimum 44.00mm.
3.5.2 Technical Specifications of 11KV tension Disc Set
3.5.2.1 Specifications of 11KV Tension Disc
Required Specification
Sl. Description of items 11KV tension disc set

No.
i Installation Outdoor, Overhead cross arm mounted
on the line.
Ii Nominal system voltage (line to Line) 11KV
Iii Maximum system voltage (line to Line) 12KV
Iv Type of system 3-phase, 50-Hz, 3-wire effectively
earthed.
V Insulator Voltage Class 15KV
Vi Insulator materials Wet process porcelain/ silicon rubber
brown glazed
Vii Type of Insulator Ball ended socket type disc, security
clip made of stainless steel on
phosphor bronzed/red brass alloy
viii Minimum Diameter of Insulator 255mm
Ix Minimum Unit spacing 140mm
X Coupling size 16mm
Xi Minimum Creepage distance 292mm
Xii Minimum withstand voltage (1 minutes)
Power Frequency (Dry) 70KV
Power Frequency (Wet) 15KV
Xiii Impulse withstand Voltage (1.2X50 micro 110KV
sec. wave)
Xiv Minimum Power Frequency Flashover 78KV

(Dry)
Xv Minimum Power Frequency Flashover 45KV
(Wet)
Xvi 50% Impulse Flashover 1.2X50micro sec. 120KV
Wave positive
Xvii 50% Impulse Flashover 1.2X50micro sec. 125KV
Wave negative
Xviii Power Frequency Puncher Voltage 110KV
Xix Minimum Dry Arching Distance 171/280mm
Xx Power Frequency Test Voltage RMS to 15KV
ground
Xxi Minimum Radio Influence Voltage (RIV) As per BS 137.2
at 1000kc in micro volt
Xxii Minimum electromechanical strength 70KN
Xxiii Minimum Mechanical failing load 70KN
3.5.2.2 Specifications of 11KV Tension Disc fittings
- 1 no. Anchor Shackle;

- 1 no. Ball Eye;
- 1 no. Socket Eye;
- 1 no. Strain Clamp;
A Anchor Shackle
I Material Forged Steel, galvanized, complete

with cotter bolt and pin
II Ultimate Tensile Strength 70KN
III Galvanization Shall be as per BS 729 part 1
B Ball Eye
I Material Forged Steel, galvanized, complete

C Socket Eye
I Material Malleable iron, galvanized, complete

D Strain Clamp
I Material Malleable iron galvanized or

Aluminium alloy, complete with cotter
bolts, nut washers and aluminium liner

II Type Bolted (2 bolt)
III Minimum Grove diameter 18mm
IV Ultimate Tensile Strength 70KN
V Galvanization All ferrous parts Shall be galvanized as

per BS 729 part 1
3.5.2.3 Construction of Tension Disc Set
3.5.2.4 Technical specification of LV Shackle Insulator
Sl. Description of items Requirements

No.
I Installation Outdoor, Overhead cross arm mounted on the line.
ii Nominal system voltage (line to 0.415KV
Line)
iii Maximum system voltage (line to 0.456KV
Line)
iv Type of system 3-phase, 50 Hz, 4-wire.
V Insulator materials Wet process porcelain brown glazed
vi Minimum Diameter of Insulator 89mm
vii Minimum height of Insulator 75mm
viii Minimum Mechanical Failing Load 14KN
(Transverse)
ix Dry Flashover 25KV
x Wet Flashover (vertical) 12KV
xi Wet Flashover (Horizontal) 15KV
3.5.2.5 Construction of LV Shackle Insulator

4.1 Documents:
The followings shall be submitted along with the bid.
(i) Printed Catalogues with detail technical information for all type Conductors and LV
Cables, Conductor Accessories, Insulators and Insulator Accessories identifying the
offered items by indelible ink.
(ii) Conductor and Cable constructional diagram and dimensions of Conductor
Accessories and Service Accessories.
(iii) Type Test Reports on offered Conductors, Cables, Conductor Accessories,
Insulators and Insulator Accessories. Test Report on higher size and higher
voltage of individual cables will be acceptable. These tests shall be from an
independent and well-known testing laboratory like KEMA, CESI, CPRI,
CEPRI, PEHLA, BUET or any other internationally accrediated laboratory
(accreditation document shall be provided along with bid).
(iv) ISO Certification: ISO Certification on offered goods.
(v) Bidder shall submit at least 2 (two) pieces of offered items as samples along with
their bid, which will be returned upon completion of the bid evaluation.
(vi) All data schedules duly filled up with appropriate technical data;
4.2 Approval of Drawings:
4.3 Packing:
The complete Conductor and Cable drum shall be covered by high class wood to protect from
external thrust and are to be export-packed for proper protection for rough handling and
transportation and storing at open space. Specific care shall be taken for protection in store
and reference is made to the climatic condition prevailing in Bangladesh.
showing the contents of each consignment and shall be enclosed in a waterproof envelope
secured to the outside of the drums. A copy of the packing list shall also be enclosed inside in
to the individual package.

- Name of supplier.
- Port of Loading.
- Contract Number.
- Measurements.
DESCO
BANGLADESH
4.4 Inspection and Testing:
The Purchaser shall have the right to inspect/test the goods/materials to confirm their
The purchaser shall be entitled at all reasonable time during manufacture to inspect, examine
and test of goods/materials at the manufacturers premises, workmanship and performance.
The Supplier shall, after consulting the purchaser, give the Purchaser reasonable notice in
testing as provided in the contract and unless the purchaser shall attend at the place so named
which shall be deemed to have been made in the purchasers presence, and shall forth with
forward to the purchaser duly certified copies of test readings.
When the purchaser intends to attend the test he shall promptly inform the supplier
accordingly in writing, so that he can take action. The purchaser shall give the supplier timely
notice in writing of his intention to attend the test.

may be reasonably demanded to carry out such test efficiently. These test shall be performed
as per relevant IEC/BS Standard or equivalent and only routine tests as agreed upon, will be
performed. All costs pertaining to Inspector's fees, travel, lodging and incidental expenses
shall be borne by the Purchaser.
As an when the purchaser is satisfied that any materials/equipment shall have passes the tests
referred to in this clause, purchaser shall notify the contractor in writing to that effect.
have the right to reject any of the items or complete batch if necessary. In that case Supplier
has to replace the Equipment and to make good of them without any financial involvement to
the Purchaser. In case any of the Equipment found not conforming to the specification at the
time of post landing Inspection, the supplier will in no way be relived from the responsibility
of replacing them on making them good at their own cost, despite the Equipment where found
good at the time of Pre-shipment Inspection.
Post Landing Inspection of delivered goods shall be done by a PLI Committee of DESCO
inspection shall be intimated to the Supplier for presence of their Representative during the
PLI. The PLI Committee in its report shall mention the exact/assessed quantity of goods. The
(vi) Visual Inspection of Goods;

(vii) Conformance with approved drawings with respect to dimensions/type/size.
(v) Quantity of supplied Goods.

5.1 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for ACSR Merln

(to be field up by the manufacturer with appropriated data, otherwise the bid will be rejected)
Sl. Description Unit Purchasers Manufacturers

No. Requirement Particulars
1 Name of the Item ACSR Merlin
2 Name of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
3 Address of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
4 Standard Performance
Design and Testing
shall be in
accordance to the
BS, IEC, VDE or
equivalent
International
standards.
5 Installation Overhead
6 Type Standard
7 Material Hard drawn
Alumonium steel
re-inforced
8 Overall diameter Mm 17.35
9 Number/diameter of Alumonium No./mm 18/3.47
10 Nominal cross sectional area of Sq.mm 179.60
conductors
11 Nominal Alumonium cross Sq.mm 170.14
sectional area
12 Number/diameter of Steel No./mm 1/3.47
13 Nominal Steel cross sectional Sq.mm 9.46
area
14 Weight of conductor Kg/Km 543
15 Drum wound length M 1300
16 Net weight Kg Shall be mentioned
17 Gross weight Kg Shall be mentioned
18 Maximum DC Resistance of /Km 0.1692
Conductor at 20 deg. C
19 Minimum breaking Load of Kg 3940
Conductor
20 Continuous current rating at 30 Amps. Shall be mentioned
deg. C rise over 40 deg. C over
ambient
21 Conductor temperature at Deg. C Shall be mentioned
specified continuous current
rating in 0.5M/sec. wind
22 Maximum short circuit current
permissible without dangerous
annealing at initial conductor
temperature of 70 deg. C
duration of fault

i) 20 sec. KA Shall be mentioned

ii) 10 sec. KA Shall be mentioned
iii) 5 sec. KA Shall be mentioned
23 Conductor temperature at the Deg.C Shall be mentioned
end of short circuit.
24 Equivalent modulus of elasticity N/sq.mm Shall be mentioned
for complete conductor
25 Equivalent co-efficient of linear /Deg.C Shall be mentioned
expansion of complete conductor
26 Maximum working tension of KN Shall be mentioned
conductor
27 Alumonium to Steel Ratio Shall be mentioned
28 Lay length Mm Shall be mentioned
29 Lay direction Right hand
30 Lay ratio 10-14

5.2 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for ACSR DOG


1 Name of the Item ACSR DOG
Design and Testing
shall be in
accordance to the
BS, IEC, VDE or
equivalent
International
standards.
6 Type Standard
Alumonium steel
re-inforced
conductors
sectional area
area
Conductor
ambient
duration of fault



conductor
28 Lay length mm Shall be mentioned
30 Lay ratio 10-14

5.3 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for ACSR Rabbit


1 Name of the Item ACSR Rabbit
Design and Testing
shall be in
accordance to the
BS, IEC, VDE or
equivalent
International
standards.
6 Type Standard
Alumonium steel
re-inforced
8 Overall diameter mm 10.05
conductors
sectional area
area
Conductor
ambient
duration of fault



conductor
30 Lay ratio 10-14

5.4 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for AAC WASP (Ins)


1 Name of the Item AAC WASP
Design and Testing
shall be in
accordance to the
BS, IEC, VDE or
equivalent
International
standards.
6 Type Standard
Alumonium
9 Diameter of bare conductor Mm 13.17
conductors
12 Insulation thickness (min.) mm 0.8
13 Co lour of Insulation Black
14 Weight of bare conductor Kg/Km 290
15 Weight of insulated conductor Kg/Km 420
Conductor
ambient
duration of fault



27 Maximum working tension of Kn Shall be mentioned
conductor
28 Lay length Mm Shall be mentioned
30 Lay ratio 10-14

5.5 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for AAC ANT (Ins)


1 Name of the Item AAC ANT
Design and Testing
shall be in
accordance to the
BS, IEC, VDE or
equivalent
International
standards.
6 Type Standard
Alumonium
8 Overall diameter mm 13.74
9 Diameter of bare conductor mm 11.34
conductors
12 Insulation thickness (min.) mm 0.8
13 Co lour of Insulation Black
14 Weight of bare conductor Kg/Km 145
15 Weight of insulated conductor Kg/Km 215
19 Maximum DC Resistance of /Km Shall be mentioned
20 Minimum breaking Load of Kg 0.5419
Conductor
21 Continuous current rating at 30 Amps. 845
ambient
duration of fault



27 Maximum working tension of Kn Shall be mentioned
conductor
30 Lay ratio 10-14

5.6 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 1-Core, 95 sq.mm NYY

Cables
( (to be field up by the manufacturer with appropriated data, otherwise the bid will be rejected)

1 Name of the Item 1CX95 sq.mm NYY
Cables
4 Standard Performance Design
and Testing shall be
in accordance to the
BS, IEC, VDE or
equivalent
International
standards.
5 Cable Size Sq.mm 1CX95
6 Material PVC Insulated plain
annealed copper.
7 Numbers & Diameter of wires mm 19/2.52
8 Maximum resistance at 30 deg. /Km 0.1964
C
9 Nominal thickness of insulation mm 1.6
10 Nominal thickness of sheath mm 1.8
11 Co lour of sheath Black
12 Approximate outer diameter mm 19.4
13 Approximate weight Kg/Km 1129
14 Continuous permissible service V 600/1000
voltage
15 Current rating at 30 deg. C Amps 270
ambient temperature U/G
ambient in air
18 Net Weight Kg Shall be mentioned

5.7 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 3.5-Core, 35 sq.mm NYY

Cables
( (to be field up by the manufacturer with appropriated data, otherwise the bid will be rejected)
Sl. Description Unit Purchasers Requirement Manufacturers

No. Particulars
1 Name of the Item 3.5CX35 sq.mm NYY
Cables
4 Standard Performance Design and
Testing shall be in
accordance to the BS, IEC,
VDE or equivalent
International standards.
5 Cable Size Sq.mm 3.5CX35
6 Material PVC Insulated plain
annealed copper.
7 Numbers & Diameter of wires mm 20/1.71+7/1.71
8 Maximum resistance at 30 deg. /Km 0.5446/1.1850
C
9 Nominal thickness of insulation mm 1.2/1.0
10 Nominal thickness of sheath mm 2.0
11 Co lour of sheath Black
12 Approximate outer diameter mm 28.40
13 Approximate weight Kg/Km 2147
14 Continuous permissible service V 600/1000
voltage
ambient temperature U/G
ambient in air

5.8 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 6 rm self supported

duplex Conductor

1 Name of the Item 6 rm self supported
duplex conductor.
4 Standard Performance Design and
Testing shall be in
accordance to the BS,
IEC, VDE or equivalent
International standards.
5 Installation Outdoor overhead, high
humid, rainfall and
temperature
6 Type Self supported, weather
proof PVC insulated,
7 Voltage Class V 600/1000V
8 Number of Core Single
9 Cable construction Each single core cable
spirally arranges to from
a self-supporting
assembly without any
cover.
10 Pitch length cm 25 (min.)
11 Conductor Material
a) Phase Conductor Plain annealed copper
conductor
b) Neutral Conductor Hard drawn copper
conductor
12 Insulation Material High quality electric
grade weather proof
PVC over core for water
tightness but ensuring
case of stripping
13 Co lour
a) Phase conductor Black
b) Neutral conductor Green
14 Insulation Thickness mm 1.6 (min.)
15 Sheath None
16 Number of Strand Nos. 7
17 Diameters of each strand mm 1.05
18 Cross sectional area of conductor Sq.mm 6
(phase & Neutral)
19 Overall diameter of conductor
a) Phase Conductor mm Shall be mentioned
b) Neutral Conductor mm Shall be mentioned
20 Weight of conductor Kg/Km Shall be mentioned
21 Net weight of Conductor in a Kg. Shall be mentioned
Drum/Reel

22 Gross weight of Drum/Reel Kg. Shall be mentioned

including conductor
23 Maximum allowable tension Kg. Shall be mentioned
24 Minimum breaking load of Shall be mentioned
Conductor
25 D.C Resistance at 20 deg.C /Km Shall be mentioned
26 Continuous current rating at Amp Shall be mentioned
ambient (air) temperature 45
deg.C
27 Reactance at 50Hz /Km Shall be mentioned


quadruplex Conductor

quadruplex
conductor.
and Testing shall be
in accordance to the
BS, IEC, VDE or
equivalent
International
standards.
5 Installation Outdoor overhead,
high humid, rainfall
and temperature
6 Type Self supported,
weather proof PVC
insulated,
9 Cable construction Each single core
cable spirally
arranges to from a
self-supporting
cover.
conductor
conductor
grade weather proof
PVC over core for
water tightness but
ensuring case of
stripping
13 Co lour
15 Sheath None
(phase & Neutral)


Drum/Reel
including conductor
Conductor
deg.C



quadruplex conductor.
and Testing shall be in
IEC, VDE or
equivalent International
standards.
humid, rainfall and
temperature
spirally arranges to
from a self-supporting
cover.
conductor
conductor
grade weather proof
PVC over core for
water tightness but
ensuring case of
stripping
13 Co lour
15 Sheath None
(phase & Neutral)


Drum/Reel
including conductor
Conductor
deg.C



quadruplex conductor.
and Testing shall be in
IEC, VDE or
equivalent International
standards.
humid, rainfall and
temperature
spirally arranges to
from a self-supporting
cover.
conductor
conductor
grade weather proof
PVC over core for
water tightness but
ensuring case of
stripping
13 Co lour
15 Sheath None
(phase & Neutral)


Drum/Reel
including conductor
Conductor
deg.C

5.12 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 11KV Pin Insulator

with Pins
(to be filled up by the Bidder/manufacturer with appropriate data, otherwise the bid will be treated as non-responsive)
Item Description of Items Required Particulars Manufacturers

Sl. Particulars
No.
1 Name & address of the Shall be furnished

Manufacturer
2 Type/Model of the offered Shall be furnished
Insulator
4 Installation Outdoor, Overhead cross
5 Nominal system voltage (line KV 11
to Line)
6 Maximum system voltage KV 12
(line to Line)
7 Type of system 3-phase, 50 Hz, 3-wire
8 Insulator Voltage Class KV 15
9 Insulator materials Wet process porcelain
brown glazed
10 Minimum Creepage distance Mm 298
11 Minimum withstand voltage
(1 minute)
12 Power Frequency (Dry) KV 70
14 Power Frequency (Wet) KV 50
15 Impulse withstand Voltage KV 110
(1.2X50 micro sec. wave)
16 Minimum Power Frequency KV 80
Flashover (Dry)
Flashover (Wet)
18 50% Impulse Flashover KV 115
1.2X50micro sec. Wave
positive
negative
20 Power Frequency Puncher KV 130
Voltage
21 Minimum Dry Arching Mm 133
Distance
22 Power Frequency Test KV 15
Voltage RMS to ground
23 Minimum Radio Influence As per BS 137.2
Voltage (RIV) at 1000kc in
micro volt

24 Minimum Neck Diameter Mm 76

25 Minimum Diameter of Mm 150
Insulator
26 Minimum height of the Mm 150
insulator
27 Minimum Grove diameter Mm 22
28 Minimum Mechanical failing KN 10
load
29 Weight of the Insulator with Kg Shall be mentioned
Pin

5.13 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 11KV Tension Disc

(to be filled up by the Bidder/manufacturer with appropriate data, otherwise the bid will be treated as non-responsive)

Sl. Particulars
No.

Manufacturer
Insulator
4 Nominal system voltage (line KV 11
to Line)
5 Maximum system voltage KV 12
(line to Line)
6 Type of system 3-phase, 50 Hz, 3-wire
7 Insulator Voltage Class KV 15
brown glazed
9 Type of Insulator Ball ended socket type
disc, security clip made
of stainless steel on
phosphor bronzed/red
brass alloy
10 Minimum Diameter of mm 255
Insulator
11 Minimum Unit spacing mm 140
12 Coupling size mm 16
14 Minimum Creepage distance mm 292
15 Minimum withstand voltage
(1 minutes)
16 Power Frequency (Dry) KV 70
17 Power Frequency (Wet) KV 15
18 Impulse withstand Voltage KV 110
(1.2X50 micro sec. Wave)
Flashover (Dry)
Flashover (Wet)
positive
negative
23 Power Frequency Puncher KV 110

Voltage
24 Minimum Dry Arching mm 171/280
Distance
25 Power Frequency Test KV 15
Voltage RMS to ground
26 Minimum Radio Influence As per BS 137.2
Voltage (RIV) at 1000kc in
micro volt
27 Minimum electromechanical KN 70
strength
28 Minimum Mechanical failing KN 70
load

5.14 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 11 KV Strain Set

(to be filled up by the Bidder/manufacturer with appropriate data, otherwise the bid will be treated as
non-responsive)

Sl. Particulars
No.
Anchor Shackle
1 Material Forged Steel, galvanized, complete

2 Ultimate Tensile KN 70
Strength
3 Galvanization Shall be as per BS 729 part 1
Ball Eye
1 Material Forged Steel, galvanized, complete

Strength
Socket Eye
1 Material Malleable iron, galvanized, complete

Strength
Strain Clamp
1 Material Malleable iron galvanized or

Aluminium alloy, complete with cotter
bolts, nut washers and aluminium liner
2 Type Bolted (3 bolt)
3 Minimum Grove mm 22
diameter
Strength
5 Galvanization All ferrous parts Shall be galvanized as

per BS 729 part 1
Total Weight of the Kg Shall be mentioned
Complete Tension Set

5.15 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for LV Shackle

Insulator
(to be filled up by the Bidder/manufacturer with appropriate data, otherwise the bid will be treated as
non-responsive)

Sl. Particulars
No.
Manufacturer
Insulator
4 Nominal system voltage (line to KV 0.415
Line)
5 Maximum system voltage (line KV 0.456
to Line)
6 Type of system 3-phase, 50 Hz, 4-wire.
brown glazed
8 Minimum Diameter of Insulator mm 89
9 Minimum height of Insulator mm 75
10 Minimum Mechanical Failing KN 14
Load (Transverse)
11 Dry Flashover KV 25
12 Wet Flashover (vertical) KV 12
13 Wet Flashover (Horizontal) KV 15
14 Weight of the Insulator Kg Shall be mentioned

6. Drawings

Lot-6 of Package-2
Supply of Prepaid Meters

Contents
1. List of Goods and Related Services ......................................................................................... 6-409
4. Drawings .................................................................................................................................. 6-269

Lot No.: Lot-6 of Package-2

Lot Name: Supply and Delivery of Prepaid Meters
ment
01 Supply & Delivery of: Single phase Smart Card, 230 Voltage 75000 Nos.
(phase to neutral), 10(60)A Pre-paid
Meter with PLC module
02 Supply & Delivery of: Three phase, 400 Voltage (phase to 7500 Nos.
phase), 20(100)A Pre-paid Meter with
PLC module

Required
No. of Goods or
Completion
Date for
Related
Services
Port of Entry
for Goods
offered from
270 days
outside the
counting
Purchasers
from 21
Country and
days after
Ex-Works for
issuance of
Goods offered
CL.
from within the
Purchasers
country.
Group-1
01 Single phase Smart Card, 75000

230 Voltage (phase to Nos.
neutral), 10(60)A Pre-paid
Meter with PLC module
02 Three phase, 400 Voltage 7500 Nos.
(phase to phase), 20(100)A
Pre-paid Meter with PLC
module

Table of Contents
Smart Card based Single phase and three phase Electronic Meter
3.1 General 6-207
3.4 Technical Specification of pre-paid meters 6-208
3.4.1 General Specificaion 6-208
3.4.2 Technical Specification on software of metering system 6-209
3.4.3 Vending Software 6-211
3.4.4 The MIC Software 6-212
3.4.5 Utility Vending Station Management 6-213
3.4.6 Load Control 6-213
3.4.7 Meter Management 6-213
3.4.8 Instant Service Management 6-214
3.4.9 Authorization Management 6-214
3.4.10 Backup Module 6-214
3.4.11 Report Management Cosole 6-214
3.4.12 Account log info report 6-215
3.4.13 Smarct Card Data Format 6-215
3.4.14 Meter Connection Procedure 6-217
3.4.15 Establishment of Data Connectivity 6-217
3.4.16 Tariff Definition 6-218
3.4.17 Tariff Algorithm 6-219
3.4.18 DESCOs present tariff rates 6-220
3.5 Specification for Single Phase pre-paid energy meter 6-223
3.5.1 Service Conditions 6-223
3.5.2 Environmental requirements 6-223
3.5.3 Standards and codes of practice 6-223
3.5.4 Specific Technical requirements 6-224
3.5.5 Electromagnetic Copatability 6-228
3.5.6 Accuracy requirements 6-228
3.5.7 Functional requirements 6-229
3.5.8 Testing and approval 6-234
3.5.9 Quality assurance 6-235
3.5.10 Software reuirements 6-235
3.5.11 Tariff Management 6-238
3.6 Specification for three phase pre-paid energy meters 6-241
3.6.1 General Technical requirements 6-242
3.6.2 Specific technical requirements 6-243
3.6.3 Fuctional requirements 6-248
3.6.4 Tariff 6-251
3.6.5 Human-machine interface displays 6-252
3.6.6 Post Landing Inspection 6-254
3.6.7 Training 6-254
3.7 Other Specific requirements 6-255
3.7.1 Information required 6-255
3.7.3 Packing 6-255
3.7.5 Post Landing Inspection 6-257
4. Guranteed Technical Data Scheule for
4.1 230 volt 10 (60) A Smart Card Pre-paid electric energy meter 6-258
4.2 400 volt 20 (100) A smart card pre-paid electricity energy meter 6-260
4.3 Data Collector 6-262
4.4 Data Concentrator 6-263

Technical Specifications
The Goods and Related Services shall comply with following Technical Specifications:
3.1 General

or equipment supplied shall be manufactured, installed and tested in accordance with the
latest revision of the relevant standard unless otherwise specified.
prior to the date of the letter or invitation to Bid, the reference shall be deemed to be to such
Deviations from this Specification or standards referred to above shall be given in the Bid and
the safety of personnel concerned with the operation and maintenance of the works.
All equipment supplied shall be designed and be of such quality as to require the minimum or
maintenance during service.
Corresponding parts of similar equipment, and equipment liable to renewal, shall be fully
interchangeable and the Contractor will be required to demonstrate this feature to the
Purchasers satisfaction.
All equipment shall operate without under vibration and with the least practical amount of
noise.
All electrical components shall be adequately rated for their most onerous duty and the
specified ambient temperature. When equipment is mounted in panels, cubicles etc., due
account shall be taken of any heat generated by the equipment therein and the components
shall be appropriately selected, rated or de-rated as necessary to suit the most onerous
operating temperatures within the enclosure.
3.2 References

The offered goods/material must be suitable for working in the climate conditions of
Bangladesh as described below:

Humidity : 98%
3.4 Technical Specifications of Prepaid Meters

The offered prepaid meters will be procured only and connected to the exixting pre-paid metering network
system.
3.4.1 General Specification
For a stable and productive electricity distribution system and an effective and trust worthy revenue
collection system Pre-Paid Metering System is evident. As the technology advancement reaches at its
peak for peace to help the utility companies to manage a well-organized electricity distribution
system, the utility companies no need to rely on conventional metering system. An adaptation of Pre-
Paid Metering System can change the needs and the requirements of better solution for the utility
companies that make the whole distribution system more dynamic and digitally enhanced. By
introducing the features and advantages of the Pre-Paid Metering System that will not only provide
freedom of the consumers but also generate a pace in collection strategy of the utility companies in
comfort eliminating all kinds of confusion and havoc of corruption.
This Prepaid metering system is a two-way communication based on smart card technology that
allows the customers to charge their advance electricity bill through DESCO's vending station in the
SMART CARD.
At the time of re-charging the vending stations computer reads and receives all the consumption
information of the consumer in the consumer-database, which helps to analyze the consumer's
electricity use behavior. After re-charging when consumer inserts his/her SMART CARD into the
Meter, the meter reads the card and downloads the amount of electricity bill that has been paid for in
the vending station. The implementation of prepaid meters helped DESCO to improve revenue
collections and reduce system loss as well.
Lets have a quick through of proposed The Pre-Paid Metering System. In prepaid model, an
electricity consumer has to buy energy credit from the utility company and to enjoy the limited bought
electricity credit into the meter before he can use the electricity. This amount is slowly credited as the
consumer uses electricity. One can refill ones necessary credit at any nearest Vending Station. As it
is clear that the consumer is solely responsible for the pre-buying energy credit and accommodating
the purchased energy for optimal use, the utility company requires no resources and personal for
billing purposes and that surely will help to improve customer care services. In a sense it is a direct
and practical procedure to help the consumers to be optimal in ones uses to reduce down the system

loss and averaging the incremental collection of the revenue. By the proposed Pre-Paid Metering
System The Load Demand will be aligned as the consumer can meet the facility of monitoring ones
installed credit initials.
But this model also introduces a chance of fraud if there is a complete lack of meter usage
supervision. This is easily corrected by introducing data exchange mechanism within the energy
meters that are able to report usage statistics, load profile, power failures, tamper data and other
relevant information.
3.4.2 The Technical Specification on the Software of the Pre-Paid Metering System
3.4.2.1 Overall Network System of the Pre-Paid eMetering System

The Technical Specification on the Network and the Software of the Pre-Paid Metering
System has mainly two parts.
The Master Information Center(MIC): All the servers, the routers, the switches, the
billing software will be located centrally in the utility premises are defined together as
The Master Information Center.
The Data Network Service Provider (Mobile Network Companies): The Data Network
Service Provider companies will be responsible and defined for providing both SIM/RIM
card data circuit for data network service having a stable bandwidth capacity.Short
Message Service (PUSH-PULL SMS) also is available and defined for the short text
messaging system activated in the mobile network companies.
3.4.2.2 The System:

The system as shown in the diagram are containing several continuous areas each performing
different particular roles.
3.4.2.3 Master Information Center(MIC):

The core area of the system is the Master Information Center(MIC). This is where all the
running communication processes and the running business processes will be installed and
located residing in the utility company premises. There will be only one Master
Information Center(MIC) per utility company.
The Master Information Center (MIC) will comprise of

The Database Servers(RDBMS): The Multiple database servers will provide reliable data
storage and delivery.
The Routers and the Firewalls: The Routers will be connected through the system master
station to The Data Network Service Provider round the clock. All the network connections
will be gone through the firewall for maximum security reasons.
The Application Server: This is a request processing side. There should be at least two
application servers at this end as to make the system a little flexible. These servers lonely will
be responsible for processes of all the requests from the Point of Sales (POS) terminals and
vending stations.
The functions of these servers are:

o To provide a real time and relentless connectivity in between the database and
POS/Utility Vending Station,
o To provide secure authentication service to POS/ Utility Vending Station,

o To process unit charge/bill pay request from POS/ Utility Vending Station,
o To ensure required encrypt data quickly,
o To transfer results and status of the data to POS/Utility Vending Station for hardcopy
receipt to a consumer,
The Short Message Server (PUSH-PULL SMS): This server will process PUSH-PULL SMS
requests arriving from the various consumers through The Data Network Service Provider.
The Accounting and Billing Server: This server will keep and produce the various billing
and transaction reports for all the vendors, mobile operators and consumers.
3.4.2.4 The Data Network Service Provider (Mobile Operators): The Data Network Service
Provider actually it refers to the mobile operators will provide three services:
Provide data network service through GPRS/EDGE/EVDO network,
Provide PUSH-PULL SMS service to utility companies and their consumers through mobile
phones.
Every Data Network Service Provider will be connected to each utility only one system master
station through a dedicate fiber or leased fiber line.
3.4.2.5 Point of Sales (POS):

The POS is where the utility consumers will come most of the time to recharge their credits.
The Consumers will deliver their meter information and pay the vendor his preferred and
demanded amount. Each POS will be equipped with a laptop or desktop, smartcard
reader/writer, a slip printer, a network modem and the POS software. The vendor will enter
these consumer details into the POS software and issue a request to process the transaction.
The POS software will use the data network service to connect to the application server at
Master Information Center and initiate a fund transfer request. Before getting the fund transfer
he should have a fund collection from the respective vending station of the respective utilities.
The process will first check whether there are enough funds available in the vendors account
for this transaction. If No then a message is sent back to the POS informing regarding the
insufficiency fund status. If there is enough fund, then the application server initiates a
transfer fund request from the vendor account. If the transfer is successful, then the server
checks the database to find the type of meter installed at the consumer premises. If it is a
keypad meter then the server will generate the n digit keypad number necessary to recharge
the meter. If it is a smartcard based meter then an encrypted data is generated that contains
instruction to update the smartcard. This number or the encrypted message along with a
success recharge message is sent back to the POS software along with the kept data of the
smart card of the respective meters(as it is a two way communicaton system). The POS
software then depending on the meter either prints the keypad code or writes into the
consumer meter smart card through the smart card reader. In both cases, the software will
print a receipt containing the amount paid instantly. The POS software will keep the till next
vended amount in accordance with its purchased amount as well as the system master station
will also follow the log of transaction for future use.
3.4.2.6 Utility Vending Stations 24x7:

This performs the same function as POS but this will be managed by the utility companies
itself round the clock. It is the wing from the utility companies to the POS vendors and the
consumers also. It will be established for multi purposes as well. The consumer will get
necessary services regarding the meters during stipulated office hours and the complains will

be attended from here. So a customization center must integrated here to give the consumer a
prompt, better and reliable service to shorten down the power cut. The POS vendors will
come here to collect the required energy during the official time table. The vending stations
will deposit the collected amount to the Bank. Again for the consumers the late hour collected
amount will be kept and deposited to the bank after certain time maintaining the friendly
hours.
ritten directly taking cash from the consumer. The vending stations along with the
customization center will be connected to The Master Information Center though a secured
dedicated leased line or where possibly through the mobile data network where leased line is
not available or not feasible.
3.4.2.7 Utility Consumers: Consumers can check their assigned load status and other information
by sending PUSH-PULL SMS by a predefined format using their mobile phones. Each utility
company will have its own short-code (example: BPAY or 2729) which will be valid for all
mobile operators. When a PUSH-PULL SMS is sent, the data network service provider will
send it directly to the Master Information Centers PUSH-PULL SMS server through the
connected network. The PUSH-PULL SMS server will process the PUSH-PULL SMS
request, generate the appropriate response and send the response back to the requesting
mobile phone containing the requested information. This will work as PUSH-PULL SMS
service.
3.4.2.8 Three phase meters: Three phase meters, unlike single phase will have on-line vending
facility. Each meter will be fitted built-in PLC modem though which the information can be
communicated to and from the meter by data collector/data concentrator. Again for those
three phase meters that is stand alone will be treated as the other single phase meters.
3.4.2.9 Customization Center: Mostly located at utility premises, this center will integrate with the
system master station to create new consumer, assign/change meter of consumer and perform
all administrative tasks to maintain consumer data integrity in the Master Information Center.
This customization center also will be integrated at each vending stations of the respective
utilities.
3.4.3 Vending Software:

The Vending Software should have Comply with DESCO's Tariff rule. This software should have
proper installer to install and this software should have a hardware constrained with a unique
hardware electronic ID like MAC address or chasis ID or Processor ID or vendor service tag no. ID or
etc.
Sales Module
This module will sale credit or energy as per consumer requirement
To Define type of Pre Payment meter.
To Collect consumer and meter related information from related MIC

database like tariff and Slab, holiday, friendly hour, Emergency credit,
connection load, and Alert level etc. and related information through
established network.
To Send defined information through Smart card.
To Collect Meter historical data that will be collected from the meter and
operational data from Smart card and update those to MIC database.
Etc. and more as required.
Report Module:

There will be a several types of reports to be generated. It has to be met the on demand
process of the each utility division.here some of its type are noted below:
Daily Sales report,
Individual consumer purchase report,
Operator related report,
Generate different type of log report,

Sales Module
o Collect consumer and meter historical Information from Smart card and get Credit
demand by key input.
o ToCollect necessary information From the MIC as per request and update smart card
by those informations.
o ToPrint module for slip print.
o ToSend acknowledgment to the MICafter completion of Operation.
o ToGenerate log file for all operations.
3.4.4 The MIC Software
MIC Application
This application will be the coreof the total pre paid metering system. Any type data modification will
be allowed and accomplishedonly by this application. It will have different management Module for
processing different type tasks.
3.4.4.1 Consumer Information Management

Information modification
o By this module onlyauthorizeduser can modify any kind of data related to consumer.
o Consumer personal information.
o Consumer tariff Class.
o Connection load.
o Issued meter related information.

Report module
o Consumer personal information
o Sales report
o Consumption report
o Historical report
Tariff Management
o Management module
Insertion of new tariff

Modification of existing tariff
Tariff Slab insertion and modification
Activation Date issue
Report module
o Individual tariff details
o All active tariff details
o Tariff history log

Etc. and more as

required.
3.4.4.2 Customized Information Management

This Module will use for include/exclude/Modification of common feature for individual or
common Consumer.
Holiday Information
Friendly Hour
Weekend
Emergency Credit Limit
Credit Alert Information
3.4.5 Utility Vending Station Management

Management module
o Issue new vending Station

o Update vending Station information.
o Deposit Information Update
o Vending Authentication information
o Vending sales Limit
Report Module
o Individual Vending related information

o Vending sales pattern
o Vending Station Deposit Status.
3.4.6 Load Control:

The feature is a unique and essential part of the system to regulate the Load
Management. This will be included into the meter and obviously the software.
This module will reside in the application software. In the meter the request will
follow the trigger of load control. So that there will be a micro-controller
programmed load control feature.
3.4.7 Meter Management

3.4.7.1 Meter Customization
o To Issue new meter for individual consumer.
o To Update meter related information to database.
o To Collect meter related information from database and send those to Meter.
o To Generate report for related task like day wise meter customization.
3.4.7.2 Meter/Smart Card Change Application

o To Change new issued meter or card related information to database
o To Send meter related information to new issued Meter.

o To Send changing information with common information to Smartcard as it

can be accessible by the particular Meter.
3.4.7.3 Meter Status Access module

This module will used for accessing meter Current information Collected from Meter
through Common Meter Status Card or RF/IR communicator or through RS232 Serial
interface.
3.4.8 Instant Service Management

It is a portable application by which utility can mentor and monitor meters installed at
Field. This application must have been hardware constrained.
To Interface to collect information from meter through Meter through Common
Meter Status Card or RF/IR communication or through RS232 Serial interface.
To Update information to Meter as per MIC requirement.
To Interface to Collect information from MIC database as per requirement to
update information to meter and stored it to temporary database at the portable
device for the time being.
To Interface to Update MIC database with collected information from occured
situation.
3.4.9 Authorization Management

As everyone cannot get permission to access every management module, this
module will use for giving permission to individual for accessing specific
management module.
It will also manage permission for user of vending Station and POS by providing
user name and password.
Etc. and more as
required.
3.4.10 Backup Module

This module is to take backup of the MIC related database.
3.4.11 Report Management Console
Sales reports
Account wise sales reports.
Daily sales reports.
Monthly sales reports.
Tariff wise sales reports.
POS wise sales reports.
Consumption reports
Account wises.
Tariff wises.
Feeder wises.
Month wises.

VAT reports
Date wises
Month wises
Year wises
Customer reports
Account wise
Meter no wise
Phase wise
Tariff wise
All customer
Exception reports
Sanction load violation reportonNo of [n]% violated
Low/No consumption report
3.4.12 Account log info report

Account wise
All
Others
Holiday report
Tariff report
Vending station/POS report
Credit given report
Vending station information report
Sales pattern
Deposit status
Vending statistics report
It is notable that the software that will be involved and installed in the MIC, UVS & UCC will be
followed on the basis of a desided convension of the Data Exchange Format that will be resposible for
The meter that must be able to read and to write data to the smartcard in specific desided format.
3.4.13 Smart Card Data Format
SLE4428 or 100% compatible 1K Byte EEPROM Memory Card must be used in the card based
meter. The memory card will have encrypted and no encrypted memory parts. The encrypted bytes
must be generated by the meter SDK/API as supplied by the manufacturer. The manufacturer is free
to use any encoding scheme to secure the data but must contain all the data as mentioned in the
following table:
Data Bytes Memory Address
(Bytes)
Non Encrypted Data
Binary Pattern (1010110011110000) 2 1-2

Version 1 3
Meter ID 10 4-13
Consumer ID 10 14-23
Utility ID 2 24-25
Sanctioned Load (kW) 6 26-31
Meter Type 1 32
Sanctioned Load Exceeded 1 33
Last Recharge Amount 2 34-35
Last Recharged Date (DMY) 3 36-38
Last Transaction ID 10 39-48
Unused/Future Provision 55 49-100
Encrypted Data as Generated by the Meter Manufacturer SDK/API
The following Data must exist within the encrypted Data: 923 101-1024
Data To Meter:Meter ID,Consumer ID,Utility
ID,Sanctioned
Load,RechargeAmount,Weekend,Emergency
Account,Friendly Hour (start/end),Peak Hour
(start/end),Buzzer Volume,Rates,Rate starts at unit,Rate at
Peak,Rate at Offpeak,Activation
Date,Holidays,Month,Day,Load Change, Load Control,
Start Time (hour/minute),Sanctioned Load, Etc. and more
as required.
Data From Meter:Tamper Status,RTC Status,LR
Status,Usage Data for the last 6 months
individually,Month,Year,KWh,Taka Recharged,Taka
Used,Average Power,Reactive Power,Maximum
Power,Volt Ampere,KWh in Peak,KWh in
Offpeak,KVarh in Peak,KVarh in Offpeak,Total charge in
Peak,Total charge in Offpeak,Number of power
failures,Number of time sanctioned load exceeded, Load
Control, Tamper,Number of times tampered,Date/Time of
Tamper, Etc. and more as required.
Function Lists: The following functions and parameters must be implemented:

Function meter_encode:
Related Parameters
Parameter Data Type
Recharge_amount Integer
Sanctioned_load Float
Sequence Number Inteter
Rate Array
Holiday Array
Loss Array
Load Change Array
Meter_id String
Unsigned char
Expected_output
(1=keyode, 2=binary data)
Meter_id String
Sanctioned Load,Weekend,Emergency
Account,Friendly Hour (start/end),Peak
Hour (start/end),Buzzer Volume,Rate,
Array
Holiday, Loss,
Load Change includes:Rates,Rate starts
at unit,Rate at Peak,Rate at

Parameter Data Type

Offpeak,Activation
Date,Holidays,Month,Day,Load
Change,Load Control, Start Time
(hour/minute),Sanctioned Load, Etc. and
more as required.
Related Response
Parameter Data Type
Status Boolean
Amount Float
Encoded_Data Byte array
Keycode String
Meter_id String
Function meter_decode:
Parameters
Parameter Data Type
Meter_id String
Related Response
Parameter Data Type
Status Boolean
Tamper Status,RTC Status,LR Status,Usage Data for the
last 6 months individually,Month,Year,KWh,Taka
Recharged,Taka Used,Average Power,Reactive
Power,Maximum Power,Volt Ampere,KWh in Peak,KWh
in Off peak, KVarh in Peak, KVarh in Off peak,Total Array
charge in Peak,Total charge in Off peak,Number of power
failures,Number of time sanctioned load exceeded,Load
control, Tamper,Number of times tampered Date/Time of
Tamper,
3.4.14 Meter Connection Procedure

The following procedure is envisioned: Configure the meter with server IP, port and any
authentication key required. Bring the meter online and send a query_test command from the
server. The meter should respond with firmware version which will verify connectivity. The
send the conf command to meter from server.
3.4.15 Establishment of Data Connectivity

The Bider who will implement will be responsible for establishment of the data connectivity
for the entire system.
Secure & Redundant Data Connectivity MIC to UCC.

Secure & Redundant Data Connectivity MIC to UVS.

Use of wireless modem in emergency case to continue Data Connectivity.
Ensure security of the network.
Ensure uptime of network
Manage network, test performance, throughput and bottleneck of network
Maintain automated network failure detection and failover. Develop a failure notification
service model
Tariff Management
3.4.16 Tariff Definition
The System Manager shall be able to define tariff objects. Each tariff has a unique tariff ID
associated with it. The following information is required to define a tariff.
Tariff ID A unique tariff identifier

Effective Date This is the date on which the tariff becomes effective.
Step Structure Step Rate1

0 - kWh1 R1
kWh1 - kWh2 R2
kWh2 - kWh3 R3
kWh3 - R4
Subject Tariff Category PFC Calculation

Power Factor À & `D Category,3phase,
Correction Charges 400V, 20KW & above 0.95
`C Category, 3phase,400V PFC= power factor
È Category, 3phase,400V obtained from
meter
Subject Tariff Category Time

Time of Use `C & È Category, Peak 17:00 to 23:00
Off Peak-23:00 to 17:00
Service Charges SC Fixed charges are levied per month. These charges are different for
single and three phase customers in a particular tariff category.
Minimum Charges There will be no minimum charges for prepaid customers, but
MC conventional customers pay a minimum charge, which varies per tariff
category.
Sanctioned Demand A fixed charge per kW of the sanctioned demand is levied per month.
Charges DC
(Fixed Charge)
1 The rate, service charge, fixed charge and minimum charges include any taxes payable.

Maximum Demand Integrated over hourly periods Maximum Demand in KW.

Charges
VAT Value added tax is levied on electricity charges and must be catered
for in the system.
The tariff code, effective date, kWhx (in units of kWh), Rx together with a fixed monthly
service charge SC and a fixed monthly sanctioned demand shall be used to define all prepaid
tariffs used in the system.
The MIC shall make provision for up to 500 tariff definitions
The MIC must verify the tariff data entered and shall not allow discontinuities in the energy
levels or negative rates for energy and fixed charges.
There shall be a facility to copy tariffs to new tariff codes for editing purposes. The edit
facility shall include a mechanism to increase the values of any of the variables Rx, SC and DC
by a fixed percentage.
Tables of Supply Group Codes and tariffs shall be securely stored at the MIC.
No penalty Charges for PFC factor above 0.95 to 1.0. PFC is computed as above and average
power factor is measured by meter based on only reactive energy. The monthly average power
factor from meter is used for the factor and applied on the monthly consumption.
3.4.17 Tariff Algorithm
The prepayment system could be implemented stepped tariffs. The tariffs will be implemented at
the vending equipment/meter. An algorithm to allocate units of electricity based on the stepped
tariff must be provided. The algorithm must ensure that:
The stepped tariff is implemented as accurately as is the case for conventionally billed
customers.
Customers are not restricted to the amount and frequency of electricity token purchases
provided purchases do not exceed 12 times the calculated monthly average consumption
without penalty.
The algorithm must use historical average consumption values to implement the stepped tariff
calculations or use an estimate for new customers.
The algorithm must allow for frequent changes in tariff rates and/or structures without costly
logistics and/or inaccurate application of the tariffs.
The algorithm shall operate as follows:
The customer purchases according to the rates specified in the stepped tariff up to the
calculated monthly average.
Any subsequent energy purchases are assumed to be for future months and the energy in
excess of the average is allocated to the next month, starting at the lowest step and
progressing through the steps until the average is reached.
Before any energy is allocated in a particular month the fixed charges are deducted.
All previous purchases but not the current purchase are used to calculate the average.
If the average increases, then the allocations are allowed up to the new average value for
the current month and future months and no corrections are required.
If the average decreases, then a correction may be made if the average drops below the
step threshold.
Slab reset, Service charges, power factor penalty(PFC) should be monthly basis.
Corrections are applied at the time of the next purchase after calculating the correction.
The Bider shall provide a detailed description of the algorithm including:
All assumptions made.

An explanation of how the averaging algorithm operates.

Examples of how the algorithm works.
Examples of how to explain the algorithm to customers.
Examples of how to deal with customer queries.
Descriptions of how the algorithm manages tariff rate and tariff structure changes
Descriptions of mechanisms to apply corrections
Descriptions to how to deal with the situation where a customer buys at two different
locations between data transfers.
3.4.18 DESCO's Present Tariff Rates

SL Customer Category and Slab Per Unit Rate (Tk.)
Category A: Residential
a First Step: From 00 to 75 units 3.33
b Second Step: From 75 to 200 units 4.73
1 c Third Step: From 201 to 300 units 4.83
d Fourth Step: From 301 to 400 units 4.93
e Fifth Step: From 401 to 600 units 7.98
f Sixth Step: From 601 to above 9.38
2 Category B: Agricultural pumping 2.51
Category C: Small Industries
a Flat Rate 6.95

3
b Off-Peak Time 5.96
c Peak Time 8.47
4 Category D: Non-Residential (Light & Power) 4.53
Category E: Commercial & Office
a Flat Rate 9.00

5
c Peak Time 11.85
Category F: Medium Voltage, General Purpose (11 KV)
a Flat Rate 6.81

6
c Peak Time 9.33
7 Category G-2: Extra High Voltage, General Purpose (132 KV)

a Flat Rate 6.16
c Peak Time 8.67
Category H: High Voltage, General Purpose (33 KV)
a Flat Rate 6.48

8
c Peak Time 9.14
9 Category J: Street Light and Water Pumps 6.48
* Minimum charge, Demand charge, Service charge and other conditions prevailing in existing tariff
and the Value Added Tax (VAT) fixed by National Board of Revenue of the Peoples Republic of
Bangladesh will be applicable as it is with the above electricity tariff.

3.5 Specification for

Single Phase
Pre-payment Energy Meters

GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.5.1 Service conditions

The meters to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous
operation under the following tropical conditions.
Sl.
Condition Specification
no.
1 Maximum ambient temperature (oC) 50
2 Minimum ambient temperature (oC) 5
3 Maximum daily average temperature (oC) 35
4 Maximum annual average temperature (oC) 30
5 Mean annual rainfall (mm) 2500
6 Minimum annual rainfall (mm) 1461
7 Maximum annual rainfall (mm) 4127
8 Maximum relative humidity (%) 100
9 Average relative humidity (%) 80
10 Maximum wind velocity (km/h) 180
11 Maximum altitude above mean sea level (meters) 200
3.5.2 Environmental Requirements

The meter shall conform to the environmental capability requirements as documented in IEC 62052-
11, 62053-21 and 62053-23. In addition to that, the following minimum requirements shall be met.
i) The meter shall be protected against malfunction due to the ingress of vermin, by conformal
coating of the printed circuit boards in the meter.
ii) Any openings shall be as small as practically possible to prevent the ingress of dirt and
vermin and to limit the potential for vandalism or tamper following IP 51.
3.5.3 Standards and codes of practice

All material and equipment supplied and all works carried out shall comply in every respect with the
technical codes of the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) and with the
recommendations of the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), which apply to the
electrical equipment.
Goods and special guarantees beyond the scope of ISO and IEC shall conform at least to one of the
following standards and codes in the following priority:
1. VDE and DIN standards
2. BS or ASTM
3. Other internationally accepted standards which ensure a quality equal to or higher than the
standards mentioned above, but only if these are submitted in the English language edition.
The following documents shall be read in conjunction with this specification. In case of conflict,
however, this document shall take precedence. Nothing in this specification shall lessen the contractors
obligations detailed in any other documents forming part of the contract.
IEC 514 Acceptance inspection of Class 1 alternating current watt-hour meters.

IEC 735 Testing equipment for electrical energy meters.
IEC 62052-11 Electricity metering equipment (AC)- General requirements, tests and test
Conditions- Part 11: Metering equipment

IEC 62055 Part 21: Framework for standardization

Part 31: Particular requirements- Static payment meters for active energy
(classes 1).
IEC 62053-21, Alternating current static watt-hour meters (classes 1)
62053-23
IEC 1036
IEC 1038 Time switches for tariff and load control
IEC 1107 Data exchange for meter reading, tariff and load control and direct local
data exchange
IEC 58 Shock and vibration, humidity, solar radiation and salt mist etc
ISO 9001 Code of practice for quality systems part 1: Model for quality assurance in
design/development, production, installation and servicing.
Others All other relevant IEC specifications for metering equipment
3.5.4 SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
The meters to be supplied against this specification shall meet the requirements specified in
this clause.
3.5.4.1 Electrical requirements

Meter supplied shall meet the following electrical requirements.
Sl. Description Specification
no
1 Connection 1-phase, 2-wire, direct connected
2 Number of element 01 (one)
3 Rated voltage 230 V phase to neutral
4 Variation in voltage +25% to 30%;
5 Continuous over voltage Should withstand 400 volts for 48 hours without
causing any damage or degrading of its operating
life, or causing changes of more than 0.01 kWh in
its credit registers (excluding the possible
decrement of credit due to power being consumed).
6 Base current, Ib 10 A
7 Maximum continuous current, Imax 60 A
8 Starting current 40 mA (0.4% Ib)
9 Rated frequency 50 Hz
10 Variation in frequency 5%
11 Power factor 0.5 lag unity 0.8 lead
12 Class index 1.0

13 Display LCD; Visibility should be sufficient to read the

meter mounted at height of 0.5 to 2.0 m.
Pin type; trans-reflective HTN or STN type
industrial grade; temperature range 200C to
+700C
14 Period of display Continuous
15 Digits WxH: 4.3 mm x 8.4 mm (minimum)
16 Comminication method PLC
17 Number of display digits 6+2
18 Display parameters i) kWh for the current billing period
ii) Total kWh used since installation
iii) Current electricity rate
iv) Emergency credit level
v) Date and time
vi) Instantaneous load
19 Power consumption in the voltage 2.5 Watts and 5 VA
circuit
20 Memory Non volatile memory that retain information up to
10 years in the absence of power
21 Power limiting Meter shall disconnect the load when a pre-
programmed threshold current is reached.
The threshold shall be programmable in steps of
500W or less.
22 Limit of Current Shall be Programmable within the range of 0.04A
> 59 A
23 Tamper detection Sensor to detect that terminal cover have been
opened
24 Load disconnection Latching relay
25 Audible alarm Buzzer
26 Lightning Protection In accordance to SABS 6KV
27 Comminication PLC
28 AMR facility Meter with PLC module for remote
communication with date collector/data
concentrator
3.5.4.2 Mechanical requirements
The enclosure shall be tamper resistant and shall be suitable for indoor mounting. The meter shall be
such that the internal components in the active part of the meter shall be protected against
unintentional damage or tamper during handling and installation.

Furthermore, Meter supplied shall meet the following mechanical requirements.
Sl.
Description Specification
no.
Meter Case The meter shall be constructed by employing flame retardant
and high impact strength material. The base, body and frame
including terminal block shall be of heat resistive; shock proof
and rust proof good quality hard material e.g. unbreakable
engineering or stamped metal or molded phenol resin which
shall be capable of withstanding of 145 C. The base will be
provided with 3 (three) screw mounting holes, 1 (one) slotted
meter support bracket at the top and 1 (one) round hole on
each side in the bottom half of the base for securely mounting
the meter to the meter board.
The meter cover shall be of molded black phenol resin or
alternatively stamped metal or toughened glass or Poly-
Carbonate. The meter cover shall be provided with a window
of Poly-Carbonate or toughened glass. For display of LCD
display.
The meter shall be effectively sealed to prevent entrance of
moisture, rain and dust into its internal parts.
2 Terminal
Side/bottom entry connection type; minimum 4 terminals to
accommodate 10 mm2 duplex; terminal cover shall be
extended type;
Terminal block shall be polycarbonate grade 500R or
equivalent bakelite; brass or copper current terminals; two
flat-head brass screws at each terminal; terminal bore
diameter 6 mm;
3 Minimum free space 45 mm
between bottom of terminal
and terminal cover
4 Connections diagrams and Every meter shall be indelibly marked with a diagram of
terminal marking connection
Meter terminals shall be marked, this marking shall appear
on the diagram
5 Insulation level Shall withstand a power frequency test of 4kV and impulse
withstand test of 6 kV
6 Protection against Conform to the degree of protection of IP51 or better
penetration of dust and
water
7 Pulse output Flashing LED visible from the front.
8 Maximum pulse frequency Shall not exceed 2.5 kHz
9 Temperature range Limit range of operation: -250C to 550C
Limit range of storage and transport: -250C to 700C

Sl.
no.
10 Name plate Every meter shall have clearly visible, indelibly and
distinctly marked name plate containing the following
information:
i) Manufacturers name
ii) Meter type
iii) Number of phases and number of wire
iv) Meter serial number and year of manufacture
v) Rated voltage of the system
vi) Basic current and maximum current
vii) Reference frequency in hertz
viii) Meter constant in imp/kWh
ix) Class index of the meter
x) UTILITY logo
3.5.4.3 Latching relay specifications
The specification for the single phase latching relay is as follows:

Sl. no Description Requirements
1 No. of coils Mim. 1 (one)
2 Rated coil voltage 9/12 VDC
3 Rated coil power 1W
4 Pulse to set 20 ms
5 Contact Material Silver alloy
6 Maximum Switching Power 15000 VA
7 Maximum Switching Voltage 250 V AC
8 Maximum Switching Current (rms) 80A
9 Contact resistance 0.6 m
10 Electrical Cycle 1x104
11 Mechanical Cycle 1x105
12 Insulation resistance 1000 M
13 Dielectric Strength between contacts 2000 VAC
15 Dielectric Strength between contact and 3000 VAC
coil (50 Hz)
16 Dielectric Strength between contacts 4000 VAC
assembly
17 Ambient temperature -40 oC ~ +55oC
18 Operating humidity 40 to 90%
19 Temperature rise at rated current (assuming 600C
300C room temp.)
3.5.4.4 Meter sealing
a) Provision shall be made for sealing the meter with at least two Ferrule steel seals.
b) The stainless steel seals shall be applied in such a way that it will not be possible to undo/loosen
the mounting screws used to secure the meter without breaking these seals.
c) The stainless steel seals shall be applied in such a way that they will be easily visible when
viewing an installed meter from the front.
d) The terminals shall also be have Ferrule /TT sealing arrangement.

3.5.4.5 Tamper detection
A tamper sensor shall be provided to detect that terminal cover have been opened either in power
supply or without power supply.
3.5.4.6 Optical Interface
The meter shall have an IEC 62056-21/DLMS compliant optical communication port. This should
allow the utility to access via front for variety of customer information stored inside the meter and to
upload it into a hand held unit (HHU).
3.5.5 Electromagnetic compatibility
(a) Immunity to electromagnetic disturbance
The meter shall be designed in such a way that conducted or radiated electromagnetic disturbances as
well as electrostatic discharge do not damage or substantially influence the meter. The disturbances to
be considered are:
i. Electrostatic discharges
ii. Electromagnetic HF field
iii. Fast transient burst
(b) Radio interference suppression
The meters shall not generate conducted or radiated noise which could interfere with other equipment.
3.5.6 Accuracy requirements
(a) Limits of error due to variation of the current
The percentage errors shall not exceed the limits for the relevant accuracy class stipulated in IEC
standard.
(b) Limits of error due to other influence quantities
The additional percentage error due to the change of influence quantities shall not exceed the limit for
the reference accuracy class stipulated in IEC standard.
(c) Limits of error due to ambient temperature variation
The limits of error shall not exceed the limits stipulated in IEC standard.
(d) Starting and running with no-load
Initial start-up of the meter: The meter shall be fully functional within 5 seconds after the voltage is
applied to the meter terminals.
Running with no load: When the voltage is applied with no current flowing in the current circuit the
test output of the meter shall not produce more than one pulse.
Starting: The meter shall start and continue to register at 0.2Ib% at power factor of 1.

(e) Meter constant
The relation between the test output and the indication in the display shall comply with the marking
on the name-plate.
3.5.7 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENT
3.5.7.1 Security
All credit and meter management tokens/message shall be meter specifically encrypted to guarantee
security of the system. Encrypted tokens shall not be reusable. Tokens/message to display status and
test the meter may be un-encrypted and reusable.
3.5.7.2 Token/message validation
If a token not meant for the meter is applied, the meter should display a message to that effect.
Similarly, if a valid token is re-entered into the meter then the meter must display an appropriate
message.
3.5.7.3 Meter personalization
In addition to factory personalization and personalization via encrypted tokens, it shall be possible to
personalize the meter from a hand held unit (HHU) provided the HHU is authorized/ programmed to
communicate with the meter.
3.5.7.4 Meter modes
The meter shall be required to support at least two modes of operation, namely the prepayment mode
and the meter test mode.
3.5.7.5 Prepayment mode
The basis of this mode is that credit is transferred to the meter, and provided the meter remains in
credit, the meter provides supply. The credit register is decremented against current consumption with
the countdown total being displayed on the meter display.
3.5.7.6 Meter test mode
The meter should support a test mode that is activated either from a dedicated test token, or using the
HHU. This test should be automated in the meter and should include a full diagnostic test, testing of
the all the active and inactive functionality, metering accuracy test (1 minute load test), and
connection validation tests. Meter test mode shall also display following information:
i) Meters software version
ii) Current limit
iii) Switch open and close count
iv) Token acceptance & rejection count
3.5.7.7 Load disconnection
a) The load shall be disconnected by a latching relay under the following conditions:

i) The credit in the meter has expired and grace period also expired.
ii) The load power threshold has been exceeded.
iii) The meter is in a tampered state.
iv) Neutral missing at source side.
b) The meter shall indicate whether the load is connected or not and shall display the reason for
disconnection.
c) The customer shall not have the option to switch the contactor manually. Under over current
conditions the mechanism to automatically reconnect the load must ensure that the number of
switching cycles is limited. The meter shall attempt to reconnect the load up to 5 times at 30-
second intervals. If the over-current condition still exits the meter shall wait a period of 30
minutes before attempting to reconnect the load.
3.5.7.8 Load control

Meters shall have the options to control loads with the following features:
Sl. no. Requirement Description

1 Allowed loads for There shall be provision in the meter to define the allowable
given time periods loads for given time periods within a day
2 Activation date of There shall be provision in the meter to accommodate the date
load allocation of activation of the defined load allocation
3 Load Limit step Load limit shall be defined in step of 500 W.
Tamper shall be detected either in power supply or without power supply.
When the meter detects a tamper condition, it should enter a shutdown state, with an appropriate
message. The customer should be disconnected immediately. The tamper status shall be reset by using
a uniquely coded tamper reset token that may only be used once.
Meter should detect reverse flow of power and measure correctly by forward registration.
Meter should measure current is phase and neutral both so that current bypass tamper taken care off.
Meter should provide tamper log data with date and time and same should be sent to main system
through two way token or through meter reading port.
3.5.7.10 Energy accounting
3.5.7.11 Credit register
The credit register is the operating account of the meter being decremented by the metering process.
The specific requirements of this register are:
a) This register must be decremented for the equivalent of every credit unit consumed.
b) When the available credit has been consumed, the meter must open the contactor and isolate
supply from the customer (unless the Friendly hours or Emergency Credit option is invoked).
c) This register can become negative from use of emergency credit.
d) The balance of this register should be written to the smart card.

3.5.7.12 Friendly hours, weekend, holidays
The meter shall accommodate the Friendly hours, Weekend and Holidays features. These are
time periods during which the meter shall not cut-off power to consumer if the credit becomes
negative. Details of the features are described in the following table.

1 Friendly hours There shall be provision to define Friendly hours in the
meter. The utility shall be able to define the Friendly hours
and shall be communicated to the meter through token.
2 Weekend There shall be provision to define Weekend in the meter.
The utility shall be able to define the weekend and shall be
communicated to the meter through token.
3 Holidays There shall be provision to define Holidays in the meter. At
the end of a year the utility shall be able to define new holiday
dates and these shall be communicated to meter through
token.
3.5.7.13 Emergency credit
Provision shall be made in the meter for an Emergency Credit facility that allows the customer to
draw on an emergency credit should the credit in the register be consumed.
The specific requirements of this facility are:
a) When the credit register value reaches a programmable Emergency Credit Threshold the
meter should sound an audible alarm, and prompt the user to accept the use of the Emergency
Credit facility (card insertion or button depression). The meter should not supply energy
against emergency credit unless acknowledged by the customer.
b) If all the available credit in the credit register is expired and power disconnected, the facility
to activate the Emergency Credit should remain an option to the user.
c) The meter should remain in service until the Emergency Credit Limit has been reached, after
which the supply should be disconnected.
d) If the Emergency credit limit is set to zero, the Emergency Credit Threshold shall function as
a low credit warning and provide the user with a visual and audible alarm that credit is low.
The user shall have the option to silence the alarm by inserting a card or pressing a button to
accept the alarm.
e) If emergency credit has been previously consumed, then the value of emergency credit used
shall be deducted from the next token inserted into the meter.
f) Once emergency credit has been exhausted, no further credit facilities shall be available until
the full emergency credit allocation has been paid for.
3.5.7.14 Consumption during current billing period
a) This register records the cumulative energy consumption for the current billing period.
b) The registers shall be updated at least every 10 Wh.
c) The value of this register shall be written to the token (if applicable).

3.5.7.15 Historic consumption
For this option there are six energy registers that store the total energy consumed for the previous six
months.
a) These registers are cycled at during the month-end process, with the oldest data being
deleted.
b) The value of these registers written to the token (if applicable).
3.5.7.16 Cumulative energy consumption
a) This register records the cumulative consumption since the meter was commissioned.
b) The units of storage are kWh, rounded to two decimal points (10 Wh).
3.5.7.17 Tariff
All tariff calculation must be done within the meter.
The meter is required to support stepped tariffs structures as well as time-of-use and maximum
demand.
The tariff structure consists of the following records:
i) Each tariff must be uniquely identified using the tariff code

ii) Each tariff shall have an activation date, being the date on which the tariff becomes
effective.
iii) Each tariff has up to seven steps (in kWh) for different levels of energy pricing.
iv) The rate describes the cost per kWh for energy consumption in that step.
3.5.7.18 Tariff management in the meter
a) Tariffs shall be entered into the meter via the smart card. The meter should not allow tariffs
to be manually entered using the push buttons.
When the meter is active, the current cannot be overwritten.
The meter must time and date stamp when the tariff is loaded into meter.
b) In general, when a tariff has expired in the meter, the tariff is automatically deleted by the
meter.
3.5.7.19 Tariff security and verification
The meter shall write the active tariff code to the token on each insertion.

3.5.7.20 Tariff switchover
When the meter detects that a new tariff is applicable (using the tariff activation date), the meter
should execute the following steps:
i) The meter shall begin the billing against the new tariff.
ii) The current tariff code shall be updated to reflect the new tariff code.
iii) The old (expired) tariff should be deleted.
iv) New tariffs will only be activated at 00:00 on the first day of a month.
3.5.7.21 Billing
Billing operates on a monthly basis. Energy consumption charge is deducted within the meter for at
least every 10 Wh. All other charges including service charge, minimum charge, vat and taxes are
deducted at the POS.
3.5.7.22 Month-end calculation
At then end of each month, the meter should perform a month-end calculation that consists of the
following minimum steps:
a) The cumulative monthly energy registers must be reset, and the historic registers must
be updated.
b) The meter must determine whether a new tariff will become active, and if so, must
delete the old tariff.
3.5.7.23 Date and time management
The meter shall be equipped with a real time clock supporting the date and time. Pseudo-clock using
mains crossing detection is not acceptable. The maximum drift of the clock shall be less than 30
seconds per month. The battery and/or auxiliary power source shall operate maintenance free for a
period of at least 10 years.
The meter must be equipped with a battery monitoring system that monitors the batterys condition
and initiates a Change Battery Alarm to the point of sale when the battery approaches the end of its
operating life. If the battery is not replaced, the failure of the battery is deemed to constitute a meter
failure, and the meter should be shut down.
3.5.7.24 Human machine interface displays
3.5.7.24.1 General requirements
a) The design philosophy of the meter display subsystem should be that a suitable message or
indication must be displayed or annunciated for every meter event and alarm without
exception.
b) The meter should make provision for the customer or utility personnel to scroll through the
displays.
c)The meter should have a default display that displays the following minimum information:

i) The Remaining Credit
ii) The Total Consumption, kWhr to date
iii) The power limit
iv) The current Tariff
3.5.7.24.2 Liquid crystal display
a) A liquid crystal display is required to display status alarm and event information.
b) An illuminated display with a minimum lifetime of ten years is required.
c) The size (number of rows and characters per row) should be appropriate for the display and
interpretation of the messages and meter information, and should be legible from a distance
of at least 500 cm with a viewing angle of no less than 30.
3.5.7.24.3 Fault and status display
The meter should provide a visible indication of the status of the incoming supply.
3.5.7.24.4 Rate LED
The meter should include a consumption rate indicator LED that emits visible red light.
3.5.7.24.5 Status/alarm/event displays
In addition to the displays required above the meter must display the following minimum information
in an intuitive way such that an inexperienced user can understand and interpret the information
intelligibly. Laminated instruction cards are to be provided for each unit.
i) Meter ID.
ii) Out of Credit message
iii) Invalid token entered
iv) Duplicate token entered
v) Meter tamper state
vi) Meter failure and/or fault code
The Bider must submit a detailed specification of the way in which the display are structured and laid
out.
3.5.8 Testing and approval
a) It will be the responsibility of the Bider to submit to the Employers representative for
approval a complete Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) for system verification.
b) Once the Employers representatives approve the ATP, the testing and performance
validation tests on 2% (random samples) of the supplied meters will commence. The
Employers representative at the utilitys premises will witness these tests.

3.5.9 Quality assurance
Biders shall comply with and be certified to the following ISO levels:
ISO 9001 Quality systems
Model for quality assurance in design development production installation and servicing
Model for quality assurance in final inspection and test
Biders shall submit copies of certification with their proposal to this effect.
3.5.10 SOFTWARE REQUIREMENT
3.5.10.1 Data Exchange Format
The meter must be able read and write data to the smartcard meter in specific format.
3.5.10.2 Smart Card Data Format
SLE4428 or 100% compatible 1K Byte EEPROM Memory Card must be used in the card based
meter. The memory card will have encrypted and no encrypted memory parts. The encrypted bytes
must be generated by the meter API as supplied by the manufacturer. The manufacturer is free to use
any encoding scheme to secure the data but must contain all the data as mentioned in the following
table:
Data Bytes Memory Address (Bytes)
Non Encrypted Data
Binary Pattern (1010110011110000) 2 1-2
Version 1 3
Meter ID 10 4-13
Consumer ID 10 14-23
Utility ID 2 24-25
Sanctioned Load (kW) 6 26-31
Meter Type 1 32
Sanctioned Load Exceeded 1 33
Last Recharge Amount 2 34-35
Last Recharged Date (DMY) 3 36-38
Last Transaction ID 10 39-48
Unused/Future Provision 55 49-100
Encrypted Data as Generated by the Meter Manufacturer SDK/API
The following Data must exist within the encrypted Data: 923 101-1024
Data To Meter:
Meter ID
Consumer ID
Utility ID
Sanctioned Load
Recharge Amount
Weekend
Emergency Account
Friendly Hour (start/end)
Peak Hour (start/end)
Buzzer Volume

Rates
Rate starts at unit
Rate at Peak
Rate at Offpeak
Activation Date
Holidays
Month
Day
Load Change
Start Time (hour/minute)
Sanctioned Load
Data From Meter:

Tamper Status
RTC Status
LR Status
Usage Data for the last 6 months individually
Month
Year
KWh
Taka Recharged
Taka Used
Average Power
Reactive Power
Maximum Power
Volt Ampere
KWh in Peak
KWh in Offpeak
KVarh in Peak
KVarh in Offpeak
Total charge in Peak
Total charge in Offpeak
Number of power failures
Number of time sanctioned load exceeded
Tamper
Number of times tampered
Date/Time of Tamper
The following functions and parameters must be implemented:

Function Lists:
Function meter_encode:
Command
meter_encode
Parameters
Parameter Data Type
Recharge_amount Integer
Sanctioned_load Float
Sequence Number Inteter
Rate Array
Holiday Array

Loss Array
Load Change Array
Meter_id String
Expected_output Unsigned char
(1=keyode, 2=binary data)
Meter_id String
Sanctioned Load Array
Weekend
Emergency Account
Friendly Hour (start/end)
Peak Hour (start/end)
Buzzer Volume
Rate, Holiday, Loss, Load Change includes:
Rates
Rate starts at unit
Rate at Peak
Rate at Offpeak
Activation Date
Holidays
Month
Day
Loss
Loss Type
Loss Rate
Load Change
Start Time (hour/minute)
Sanctioned Load
Response
Parameter Data Type
Status Boolean
Amount Float
Keycode String
Meter_id String
Function meter_decode:
Command
meter_decode
Parameters
Parameter Data Type
Meter_id String
Response
Parameter Data Type
Status Boolean
Tamper Status Array
RTC Status
LR Status
Usage Data for the last 6 months individually
Month

Year
KWh
Taka Recharged
Taka Used
Average Power
Reactive Power
Maximum Power
Volt Ampere
KWh in Peak
KWh in Offpeak
KVarh in Peak
KVarh in Offpeak
Total charge in Peak
Total charge in Offpeak
Number of power failures
Number of time sanctioned load exceeded
Loss Charge
o Type of Loss
o Loss charge in Peak
o Loss charge Offpeak
Tamper
Number of times tampered
Date/Time of Tamper
3.5.11 Tariff Management
3.5.11.1 Tariff Definition
The System Manager shall be able to define tariff objects. Each tariff has a unique tariff ID
associated with it. The following information is required to define a tariff.
Tariff ID A unique tariff identifier

Effective Date The date on which the tariff will be effective.
Step Structure Step Rate2

0 - kWh1 R1
kWh1 - kWh2 R2
kWh2 - kWh3 R3
kWh3 - R4

Subject Tariff Category PFC Calculation

Power Factor Correction À & `D Category,3phase, 400V, 20KW
Charges & above 0.95
`C Category, 3phase,400V PFC= power factor
È Category, 3phase,400V obtained from meter
Subject Tariff Category Time

Time of Use `C & È Category, Peak 17:00 to 23:00
Off Peak-23:00 to 17:00
Service Charges Fixed charges are levied per month. These charges are different for
single phase and three phase meters in a particular tariff category.
Minimum Charges There will be no minimum charges for Pre-Paid System.
Sanctioned Demand A fixed charge per kW of the sanctioned demand is levied per month.
Charges
(Fixed Charge)
Maximum Demand Integrated over hourly periods Maximum Demand in KW.
Charges
VAT Value added tax is levied on electricity charges and must be catered
for in the system.
The tariff code, effective date, kWhx (in units of kWh), Rx together with a fixed monthly service
charge Service Charges and a fixed monthly sanctioned demand shall be used to define all prepaid
tariffs used in the system.
The MIC shall make provision for up to 500 tariff definitions.
The MIC must verify the tariff data entered and shall not allow discontinuities in the energy levels
or negative rates for energy and fixed charges.
There shall be a facility to copy tariffs to new tariff codes for editing purposes. The edit facility
shall include a mechanism to increase the values of any of the variables Rx, SC and DC by a fixed
percentage.
Tables of Supply Group Codes and tariffs shall be securely stored at the MIC.
No penalty Charges for PFC factor above 0.95 to 1.0. PFC is computed as above and average
power factor is measured by meter based on only reactive energy. The monthly average power
factor from meter is used for the factor and applied on the monthly consumption.
3.5.11.2 Tariff Algorithm
The prepayment system could be implemented stepped tariffs. The tariffs will be implemented at the
vending equipment/meter. An algorithm to allocate units of electricity based on the stepped tariff must
be provided. The algorithm must ensure that:
The stepped tariff is implemented as accurately as is the case for conventionally billed customers.
Customers are not restricted to the amount and frequency of electricity token purchases provided
purchases do not exceed 12 times the calculated monthly average consumption without penalty.
The algorithm must use historical average consumption values to implement the stepped tariff
calculations or use an estimate for new customers.

The algorithm must allow for frequent changes in tariff rates and/or structures without costly
logistics and/or inaccurate application of the tariffs.
The algorithm shall operate as follows:
The customer purchases according to the rates specified in the stepped tariff up to the
calculated monthly average.
Any subsequent energy purchases are assumed to be for future months and the energy in
excess of the average is allocated to the next month, starting at the lowest step and
progressing through the steps until the average is reached.
Before any energy is allocated in a particular month the fixed charges are deducted.
All previous purchases but not the current purchase are used to calculate the average.
If the average increases, then the allocations are allowed up to the new average value for the
current month and future months and no corrections are required.
If the average decreases, then a correction may be made if the average drops below the step
threshold.
Slab reset, Service charges, power factor penalty(PFC) should be monthly basis.
Corrections are applied at the time of the next purchase after calculating the correction.
The Bider shall provide a detailed description of the algorithm including:
All assumptions made.
An explanation of how the averaging algorithm operates.
Examples of how the algorithm works.
Examples of how to explain the algorithm to customers.
Examples of how to deal with customer queries.
Descriptions of how the algorithm manages tariff rate and tariff structure changes
Descriptions of mechanisms to apply corrections
Descriptions to how to deal with the situation where a customer buys at two different
locations between data transfers.
Online data transfer is required so that customer can by token from any vending system and
different locations.

3.6 Specification
for
Three Phase Online Pre-payment Energy Meters.

3.6.1 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.6.1.1 Service conditions

The meters to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous
operation under the following tropical conditions.
Sl.
Condition Specification
no.
o
1 Maximum ambient temperature ( C) 50
2 Minimum ambient temperature (oC) 5
3 Maximum daily average temperature (oC) 35
4 Maximum annual average temperature (oC) 30
5 Mean annual rainfall (mm) 2500
6 Minimum annual rainfall (mm) 1461
7 Maximum annual rainfall (mm) 4127
8 Maximum relative humidity (%) 100
9 Average relative humidity (%) 80
10 Maximum wind velocity (km/h) 180
11 Maximum altitude above mean sea level (meters) 200
3.6.1.2 Environmental Requirements

The meter shall conform to the environmental capability requirements as documented in IEC 62052-
11, 62053-21 and 62053-23. In addition to that, the following minimum requirements shall be met.
iii) The meter shall be protected against malfunction due to the ingress of vermin, by conformal
coating of the printed circuit boards in the meter.
iv) Any openings shall be as small as practically possible to prevent the ingress of dirt and
vermin and to limit the potential for vandalism or tamper following IP 51.
3.6.1.3 Standards and codes of practice

All material and equipment supplied and all works carried out shall comply in every respect with the
technical codes of the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) and with the
recommendations of the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), which apply to the
electrical equipment.
Goods and special guarantees beyond the scope of ISO and IEC shall conform at least to one of the
following standards and codes in the following priority:
4. VDE and DIN standards
5. BS or ASTM
6. Other internationally accepted standards which ensure a quality equal to or higher than the
standards mentioned above, but only if these are submitted in the English language edition.
The following documents shall be read in conjunction with this specification. In case of conflict,
however, this document shall take precedence. Nothing in this specification shall lessen the contractors
obligations detailed in any other documents forming part of the contract.
IEC 514 Acceptance inspection of Class 1 alternating current watt-hour meters.

IEC 735 Testing equipment for electrical energy meters.
IEC 62052-11 Electricity metering equipment (AC)- General requirements, tests and test

Conditions- Part 11: Metering equipment

IEC 62055 Part 21: Framework for standardization
Part 31: Particular requirements- Static payment meters for active energy
(classes 1).
IEC 62053-21, Alternating current static watt-hour meters (classes 1)
62053-23
IEC 1036
IEC 1038 Time switches for tariff and load control
IEC 58 Shock and vibration, humidity, solar radiation and salt mist etc
ISO 9001 Code of practice for quality systems part 1: Model for quality assurance in
design/development, production, installation and servicing.
Others All other relevant IEC specifications for metering equipment
3.6.2 SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
The meters to be supplied against this specification shall meet the requirements specified in
this clause.
3.6.2.1 Electrical requirements

Meter supplied shall meet the following electrical requirements.
Sl. Description Specification

No
1 Connection 3-phase, 4-wire, undirect connected
2 Number of element 3 (Three)
3 Rated voltage 400 V phase to phase
4 Variation in voltage +25% to 30%;
5 Continuous over voltage Should withstand 500 volts for 48 hours without
causing any damage or degrading of its operating
life, or causing changes of more than 0.01 kWh in
its credit registers (excluding the possible
decrement of credit due to power being consumed).
6 Base current, Ib 20 A
7 Maximum continuous current, Imax 100 A
8 Starting current 40 mA (0.4% Ib)
9 Rated frequency 50 Hz
10 Variation in frequency 2%
11 Power factor 0.5 lag unity 0.8 lead
12 Class index 1.0
13 Clock Built-in real time clock with 10 years battery
backup

14 Display LCD; Visibility should be sufficient to read the

meter mounted at height of 0.5 to 2.0 m.
Pin type; trans-reflective HTN or STN type
industrial grade; temperature range 200C to
+700C
15 Period of display Continuous
16 Digits WxH: 4 mm x 9 mm (minimum)
17 Maximum viewing angle 90 degrees
18 Number of display digits 6+2
19 Display parameters vii) kWh for the current billing period
viii) Total kWh used since installation
ix) Current electricity rate
x) Emergency credit level
xi) Date and time
xii) Instantaneous load
xiii) Instantaneous phase voltage
xiv) Instantaneous phase current
xv) Instantaneous pf
20 Power consumption in the voltage 5 Watts and 10 VA
circuit
21 Memory Non volatile memory that retain information up to
10 years in the absence of power
22 Power limiting Meter shall disconnect the load when a pre-
programmed threshold current is reached.
The threshold shall be programmable in steps of
500W or less.
23 Limit of Current Shall be Programmable within the range of 0.04A
> 100 A
24 Tamper detection Sensor to detect that terminal cover have been
opened
25 Load disconnection Latching relay
26 Audible alarm Buzzer
27 Lightning Protection In accordance to SABS:6 KV
28 Comminication Power Line Communication (PLC)
29 AMR facility Meter with PLC module for remote
communication with date collector/data
concentrator

3.6.2.2 Mechanical requirements
The enclosure shall be tamper resistant and shall be suitable for indoor mounting. The meter shall be
such that the internal components in the active part of the meter shall be protected against
unintentional damage or tamper during handling and installation.
Furthermore, Meter supplied shall meet the following mechanical requirements.
Sl.
no.
Meter Case The meter shall be constructed by employing
flame retardant and high impact strength
material. The base, body and frame including
terminal block shall be of heat resistive; shock
proof and rust proof good quality hard material
e.g. unbreakable engineering or stamped metal
or molded phenol resin which shall be capable
of withstanding of 145 C. The base will be
provided with 3 (three) screw mounting holes, 1
(one) slotted meter support bracket at the top
and 1 (one) round hole on each side in the
bottom half of the base for securely mounting
the meter to the meter board.
The meter cover shall be of molded black
phenol resin or alternatively stamped metal or
toughened glass or Poly-Carbonate. The meter
cover shall be provided with a window of Poly-
Carbonate or toughened glass. For display of
LCD display.
The meter shall be effectively sealed to prevent
entrance of moisture, rain and dust into its
internal parts.
2 Terminal Side/bottom entry connection type; minimum 4
terminals to accommodate 10 mm2 duplex;
terminal cover shall be extended type;
Terminal block shall be polycarbonate grade
500R or equivalent bakelite; brass or copper
current terminals; two flat-head brass screws
at each terminal; terminal bore diameter 8.5
mm;
3 Minimum free space between bottom of 45 mm
terminal and terminal cover
4 Connections diagrams and terminal Every meter shall be indelibly marked with a
marking diagram of connection
Meter terminals shall be marked, this marking
shall appear on the diagram
5 Insulation level Shall withstand a power frequency test of 4kV
and impulse withstand test of 6 kV
6 Protection against penetration of dust and Conform to the degree of protection of IP51
water or better
7 Top cover sealing Hermitically sealed or ultrasonic welded
8 Pulse output Flashing LED visible from the front.

Sl.
no.
9 Maximum pulse frequency Shall not exceed 2.5 kHz
10 Temperature range Limit range of operation: -250C to 550C
Limit range of storage and transport: -250C to
700C
11 Name plate Every meter shall have clearly visible,
indelibly and distinctly marked name plate
containing the following information:
xi) Manufacturers name
xii) Meter type
xiii) Number of phases and number of
wire
xiv) Meter serial number and year of
manufacture
xv) Rated voltage of the system
xvi) Basic current and maximum current
xvii) Reference frequency in hertz
xviii) Meter constant in imp/kWh
xix) Class index of the meter
xx) Over-current breaking capacity (in
kA)
xxi) UTILITY logo
3.6.2.3 Latching relay specifications
The specification for the three phase latching relay is as follows:

Sl. no Description Requirements
1 No. of coils 1
2 Rated coil voltage 9/12 VDC
3 Rated coil power 9W
4 Pulse to set 30 ms
5 Contact Material Silver alloy
6 Maximum Switching Power 25,000 VA
7 Maximum Switching Voltage 250 V AC
8 Maximum Switching Current (rms) 120A
9 Contact resistance 2 m
10 Electrical Cycle 5x103
11 Mechanical Cycle 1x105
12 Insulation resistance 1,000 M
13 Dielectric Strength between open contacts 2,000 VAC
14 Dielectric Strength between contact and coil 3,000 VAC
(50 Hz)
15 Dielectric Strength between contacts 4,000 VAC
assembly
16 Ambient temperature -40 oC ~ +55 oC
17 Operating humidity 40 to 90%
18 Temperature rise at rated current (assuming 600C
300C room temp.)

3.6.2.4 Meter sealing
e) Provision shall be made for sealing the meter with at least two seals.
A tamper sensor shall be provided to detect that terminal cover have been opened either in power
supply or without power supply.
3.6.2.6 Optical Interface
The meter shall have an IEC 62056-21/DLMS compliant optical communication port. This should
allow the utility to access via front for variety of customer information stored inside the meter and to
upload it into a hand held unit (HHU).
3.6.2.7 Electromagnetic compatibility

(a) Immunity to electromagnetic disturbance
The meter shall be designed in such a way that conducted or radiated electromagnetic disturbances as
well as electrostatic discharge do not damage or substantially influence the meter. The disturbances to
be considered are:
i. Electrostatic discharges
ii. Electromagnetic HF field
iii. Fast transient burst
(b) Radio interference suppression
The meters shall not generate conducted or radiated noise which could interfere with other equipment.
3.6.2.8 Accuracy requirements
(a) Limits of error due to variation of the current
The percentage errors shall not exceed the limits for the relevant accuracy class stipulated in IEC
standard.
(b) Limits of error due to other influence quantities
The additional percentage error due to the change of influence quantities shall not exceed the limit for
the reference accuracy class stipulated in IEC standard.
(c) Limits of error due to ambient temperature variation
The limits of error shall not exceed the limits stipulated in IEC standard.
(d) Starting and running with no-load
Initial start-up of the meter: The meter shall be fully functional within 5 seconds after the voltage is
applied to the meter terminals.
Running with no load: When the voltage is applied with no current flowing in the current circuit the
test output of the meter shall not produce more than one pulse.

Starting: The meter shall start and continue to register at 0.4Ib% at power factor of 1.
(e) Meter constant
The relation between the test output and the indication in the display shall comply with the marking
on the name-plate.
3.6.3 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENT
3.6.3.1 Security
All credit and meter management tokens shall be meter specifically encrypted to guarantee security of
the system. Encrypted tokens shall not be reusable. Tokens to display status and test the meter may be
un-encrypted and reusable.
3.6.3.2 Token validation
If a token not meant for the meter is applied the meter should display a message to that effect.
Similarly, if a valid token is re-entered into the meter then the meter must display an appropriate
message.
3.6.3.3 Meter personalization
In addition to factory personalization and personalization via encrypted tokens, it shall be possible to
personalize the meter from a hand held unit (HHU) provided the HHU is authorized/programmed to
communicate with the meter.
3.6.3.4 Meter modes
The meter shall be required to support at least two modes of operation, namely the prepayment mode
and the meter test mode.
3.6.3.5 Prepayment mode
The basis of this mode is that credit is transferred to the meter, and provided the meter remains in
credit, the meter provides supply. The credit register is decremented against current consumption with
the countdown total being displayed on the meter display.
3.6.3.6 Meter test mode
The meter should support a test mode that is activated either from a dedicated test token, or using the
HHU. This test should be automated in the meter and should include a full diagnostic test, testing of
the all the active and inactive functionality, metering accuracy test (1 minute load test), and
connection validation tests. Meter test mode shall also display following information:
i) Meters software version
ii) Current limit
iii) Switch open and close count
iv) Token acceptance & rejection count

3.6.3.7 Load disconnection
a) The load shall be disconnected by a latching relay under the following conditions:
i) The credit in the meter has expired and grace period also expired.
ii) The load power threshold has been exceeded.
iii) The meter is in a tampered state.
iv) Neutral missing at source side.
b) The meter shall indicate whether the load is connected or not and shall display the reason for
disconnection.
c) The customer shall not have the option to switch the contactor manually. Under over current
conditions the mechanism to automatically reconnect the load must ensure that the number of
switching cycles is limited. The meter shall attempt to reconnect the load up to 5 times at 30-
second intervals. If the over-current condition still exits the meter shall wait a period of 30
minutes before attempting to reconnect the load.
3.6.3.8 Load control

Meters shall have the options to control loads with the following features:

1 Allowed loads for There shall be provision in the meter to define the allowable
given time periods loads for given time periods within a day
2 Activation date of There shall be provision in the meter to accommodate the date
load allocation of activation of the defined load allocation
3 Load Limit step Load limit shall be defined in step of 500 W.
Tamper shall be detected either in power supply or without power supply.
When the meter detects a tamper condition, it should enter a shutdown state, with an appropriate
message. The customer should be disconnected immediately. The tamper status shall be reset by
using a uniquely coded tamper reset token that may only be used once.
Meter should detect reverse flow of power and measure correctly by forward registration.
Meter should measure current is phase and neutral both so that current bypass tamper taken care
off.
Meter should provide tamper log data with date and time and same should be sent to main
system through two way token or through meter reading port.
3.6.3.10 Energy Accounting
3.6.3.10.1 Credit register

The credit register is the operating account of the meter being decremented by the metering
process. The specific requirements of this register are:
a) This register must be decremented for the equivalent of every credit unit consumed.
b) When the available credit has been consumed, the meter must open the contactor and
isolate supply from the customer (unless the Friendly hours or Emergency Credit
option is invoked).
c) This register can become negative from use of emergency credit.
d) The balance of this register should be written to the token.
3.6.3.11 Friendly hours, weekend, holidays
The meter shall accommodate the Friendly hours, Weekend and Holidays features. These are
time periods during which the meter shall not cut-off power to consumer if the credit becomes
negative. Details of the features are described in the following table.

1 Friendly hours There shall be provision to define Friendly hours in the
meter. The utility shall be able to define the Friendly hours
and shall be communicated to the meter through token.
2 Weekend There shall be provision to define Weekend in the meter.
The utility shall be able to define the weekend and shall be
communicated to the meter through token.
3 Holidays There shall be provision to define Holidays in the meter. At
the end of a year the utility shall be able to define new holiday
dates and these shall be communicated to meter through
token.
3.6.3.12 Emergency credit
Provision shall be made in the meter for an Emergency Credit facility that allows the customer to
draw on an emergency credit should the credit in the register be consumed.
The specific requirements of this facility are:
a) When the credit register value reaches a programmable Emergency Credit Threshold the
meter should sound an audible alarm, and prompt the user to accept the use of the Emergency
Credit facility (card insertion or button depression). The meter should not supply energy
against emergency credit unless acknowledged by the customer.
b) If all the available credit in the credit register is expired and power disconnected, the facility
to activate the Emergency Credit should remain an option to the user.
c) The meter should remain in service until the Emergency Credit Limit has been reached, after
which the supply should be disconnected.
d) If the Emergency credit limit is set to zero, the Emergency Credit Threshold shall function as
a low credit warning and provide the user with a visual and audible alarm that credit is low.
The user shall have the option to silence the alarm by inserting a card or pressing a button to
accept the alarm.
e) If emergency credit has been previously consumed, then the value of emergency credit used
shall be deducted from the next token inserted into the meter.

f) Once emergency credit has been exhausted, no further credit facilities shall be available until
the full emergency credit allocation has been paid for.
3.6.3.13 Consumption during current billing period
a) This register records the cumulative energy consumption for the current billing period.
b) The registers shall be updated at least every 10 Wh.
3.6.3.14 Historic consumption
For this option there are six energy registers that store the total energy consumed for the previous six
months.
a) These registers are cycled at during the month-end process, with the oldest data being deleted.
b) The value of these registers written to the token (if applicable).
3.6.3.15 Cumulative energy consumption
a) This register records the cumulative consumption since the meter was commissioned.
b) The units of storage are kWh, rounded to two decimal points (10 Wh).
3.6.4 Tariff
All tariff calculation must be done within the meter.
The meter is required to support stepped tariffs structures as well as time-of-use and maximum
demand.
The tariff structure consists of the following records:
i) Each tariff must be uniquely identified using the tariff code

ii) Each tariff shall have an activation date, being the date on which the tariff becomes
effective.
iii) Each tariff has up to seven steps (in kWh) for different levels of energy pricing.
iv) The rate describes the cost per kWh for energy consumption in that step.
3.6.4.1 Tariff management in the meter
c) Tariffs shall be entered into the meter via the two-way token or HHU. The meter should not
allow tariffs to be manually entered using the push buttons.
When the meter is active, the current cannot be overwritten.
The meter must time and date stamp when the tariff is loaded into meter.

d) In general, when a tariff has expired in the meter, the tariff is automatically deleted by the
meter.
3.6.4.2 Tariff security and verification
The meter shall write the active tariff code to the token on each insertion.
3.6.4.3 Tariff switchover
When the meter detects that a new tariff is applicable (using the tariff activation date), the meter
should execute the following steps:
i) The meter shall begin the billing against the new tariff.
ii) The current tariff code shall be updated to reflect the new tariff code.
iii) The old (expired) tariff should be deleted.
iv) New tariffs will only be activated at 00:00 on the first day of a month.
3.6.4.4 Billing
Billing operates on a monthly basis. Energy consumption charge is deducted within the meter for at
least every 10 Wh. All other charges including service charge, minimum charge, vat and taxes are
deducted at the POS.
3.6.4.5 Month-end calculation
At then end of each month, the meter should perform a month-end calculation that consists of the
following minimum steps:
c) The cumulative monthly energy registers must be reset, and the historic registers must
be updated.
d) The meter must determine whether a new tariff will become active, and if so, must
delete the old tariff.
3.6.4.6 Date and time management
The meter shall be equipped with a real time clock supporting the date and time. Pseudo-clock using
mains crossing detection is not acceptable. The maximum drift of the clock shall be less than 30
seconds per month. The battery and/or auxiliary power source shall operate maintenance free for a
period of at least 10 years.
The meter must be equipped with a battery monitoring system that monitors the batterys condition
and initiates a Change Battery Alarm to the point of sale when the battery approaches the end of its
operating life. If the battery is not replaced, the failure of the battery is deemed to constitute a meter
failure, and the meter should be shut down.
3.6.5 Human machine interface displays
3.6.5.1 General requirements
d) The design philosophy of the meter display subsystem should be that a suitable message or
indication must be displayed or annunciated for every meter event and alarm without
exception.

e)The meter should make provision for the customer or utility personnel to scroll through the
displays.
f) The meter should have a default display that displays the following minimum information:
i) The Remaining Credit
ii) The Total Consumption, kWhr to date
iii) The power limit
iv) The current Tariff
3.6.5.2 Liquid crystal display
d) A liquid crystal display is required to display status alarm and event information.
e) An illuminated display with a minimum lifetime of ten years is required.
f) The size (number of rows and characters per row) should be appropriate for the display and
interpretation of the messages and meter information, and should be legible from a distance
of at least 500 cm with a viewing angle of no less than 30.
3.6.5.3 Fault and status display
The meter should provide a visible indication of the status of the incoming supply.
3.6.5.4 Rate LED
The meter should include a consumption rate indicator LED that emits visible red light.
3.6.5.5 Status/alarm/event displays
In addition to the displays required above the meter must display the following minimum information
in an intuitive way such that an inexperienced user can understand and interpret the information
intelligibly. Laminated instruction cards are to be provided for each unit.
i) Meter ID.
ii) Out of Credit message
iii) Invalid token entered
iv) Duplicate token entered
v) Meter tamper state
vi) Meter failure and/or fault code
The tenderer must submit a detailed specification of the way in which the display are structured and
laid out.
3.6.5.6 Meter identification cards

a) Each meter shall be supplied with a meter identification card, which is used for recharge.
b) The printed details and graphic design of the cards shall be submitted to the utility prior to
producing the cards.

3.6.5.7 Testing and approval
a) It will be the responsibility of the tenderer to submit to the Employers representative for
approval a complete Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) for system verification.
b) Once the Employers representatives approve the ATP, the testing and performance
validation tests on 2% (random samples) of the supplied meters will commence. The
Employers representative at the utilitys premises will witness these tests.
3.6.5.8 Quality assurance
Tenderers shall comply with and be certified to the following ISO levels:
ISO 9001 Quality systems
Model for quality assurance in design development production installation and servicing
Model for quality assurance in final inspection and test
Tenderers shall submit copies of certification with their proposal to this effect.
3.6.6 Post Landing Inspection:

The inspection and tests may be conducted on the premises of the Supplier or its Sub-
Contractor at point of delivery and/or at the goods' final destination, Where conducted on the
premises of the Supplier or its Sub-Contractor all reasonable facilities and assistance including
access to drawings and production data shall be furnished to the inspectors at no charge to the
Purchaser.
Should any inspected or tested goods fail to conform to the Specifications, the Purchaser may
reject them and the Supplier shall either replace the rejected goods or make all alterations
necessary to meet the specification, requirements free of cost to the Purchaser.
The Purchaser's right to inspect, test and where necessary, reject the goods after the goods
arrival in the Purchaser's country shall in no way be limited or waived by reason of the goods
having previously been inspected, tested and passed by the Purchaser or its representative prior
to the goods shipment from the country of origin.
3.6.7 Training
Training organization/administration
The contractor shall arrange training program for 8 (eight) Purchasers nominated engineer for two
weeks on meter technology, installation, testing, commissioning, operation and maintenance of Pre-
paid Metering System including data analysis, software configuration, troubleshooting, meter
programming, vending station management etc. at the Metering unit Manufacturers
Premises/Laboratories. The Contractor will be responsible for bearing all costs for the trainees
including visa fees, air fares, accommodation, fooding, laundry, transportation etc plus a daily
allowance as per DESCOs prevailing standard for each of the trainees. The supplier shall also arrange
field visit during training. The entire cost relating this training program shall be within the contract
price.

The Contractor shall also train locally 20 (twenty) technicians/operators of all for 4 (four) weeks at
working site. All cost including traveling, lodging, food and pocket expenses shall have to be borne
by the Contractor at their own cost.
3.7.1 Information required:
The followings shall be submitted along with the Bid.
(viii) Characteristics Curves along with Printed Catalogues describing construction

operation and maintenance guide of offered Meters. In case of Fuse Element the
manufacturer shall submit maximum clearing time and minimum melting time
curves for fuse link.
(ix) Constructional diagram and dimensions of the offered items.
(x) Catalogue containing detail technical information of offered Prepaid Meters and
type shall be indicated by red ink.
(xi) Outline dimension & drawings of offered items.
(xii) Type Test Reports on offered Meters. These tests shall be from an independent
and well-known testing laboratory like KEMA, CESI, CPRI, CEPRI, PEHLA,
MID Recognized Lab etc. or any other internationally accrediated laboratory
(accreditation document shall be provided along with bid)
(xiii) ISO Certification: ISO Certification on offered goods.
(xiv) At least 2 samples of each category of the offered equipment shall be supplied
with the bid, these samples are to be returned to the bidder after award of
contract.
(xv) All data schedules duly filled up with appropriate technical data;
3.7.3 Packing:

Purchaser.
package.
- Name of supplier.
- Port of Loading.
- Contract Number.
- Measurements.
DESCO
BANGLADESH


The tests, as agreed upon by the purchaser and the supplier, shall be performed as per relevant
IEC/BS Standard or equivalent.
Costs related to inspection and testing
by the purchaser.
Post landing inspection of delivered goods shall be done by a PLI committee of DESCO
inspection shall be intimated to the of Supplier for presence of their representative during the
PLI. The PLI committee in its report shall mention the exact/assessed quantity of goods. The
(i) Visual Inspection of goods;

(iii) Quantity of supplied goods.

4. Guranteed Technical Data Scedule

4.1 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 230 Volt 10(60) A Smart Card
Prepayment Electric Energy Meter
(To be filled up and signed by the Manufacturer, otherwise the offer will not be acceptable)
Sl. Name of Item Unit Required Manufacturers
No. specifications Particulars
1 Reference Standard - IEC I
2 Country of Origin To be mentioned

3 Manufacturers Name & To be mentioned
address
4 Place of Manufacturer To be mentioned
5 Starting Year of To be mentioned
Manufacture & Testing
6 Model of Meter - To be mentioned
7 Generation of the offered To be mentioned
Meter
8 Type - To be mentioned
9 Installation Indoor installation
10 Connection - 1- phase, 2-wire
(unidirectional)
11 Rated voltage Volt 230
12 Maximum voltage Volt 280
13 Basic Current Amp <=10
14 Maximum Current Amp >=60
15 Frequency HZ 50
16 Number of Terminal No. 4
17 Diameter of Terminal; Bore mm 6mm to
accommodate 10
mm2 cable
18 No. of Element (minimum) No. 1
19 Voltage circuit loss at rated VA & 5VA, 2 Watt
voltage W
20 Current circuit loss at rated VA 2.5
current
21 Variation of Power factor 0.5 lag to 0.8 lead 0.5
22 Variation of voltage -30% to +30%
23 Performance Curve To be submitted
24 Impulse withstand voltage KV 6
25 Starting current (minimum) mA 0.4% of basic current
26 KWh register type - LCD Display
27 Meter constant Impulse/ To be mentioned
kWhr
28 Accuracy class Class 1.0
29 Type of Battery Lithium Battery
30 Built in clock To be mentioned
31 Battery Reserve & Life 10(Ten) Years
32 No. of Digits for Credit min. 5+1
Storage
33 Credit Transfer System To be mentioned
34 Tariff Structure Utilitys tariff

Sl. Name of Item Unit Required Manufacturers

No. specifications Particulars
structure
35 KWhr dispensing register Solid state LCD
Display
36. Front Page Indications - Credit Status,
- Accept/Reject
- Low credit warning
- Consumption Rate
- Tamper Indication
37. Disconnection Facility - On credit expiry, -
- Decommissioning
state
- Exceeded Power
threshold
- When tampered
38. Provision for emergency To be Mentioned
Friendly Credit
40. Time interval of re- Year 10
calibration (minimum)
41 Service life (minimum) Year 10
42 Weight of meter Kg To be mentioned
43 Overall dimensions (height, mm To be mentioned
width, depth)
44 Load Control To be mentioned
45 Warranty Years 3 Years
46 List of Recommended To be mentioned
Spares
47 AMR Online facility PLC module for
AMR function
48 Communication PLC
49 Any other facility if any To be mentioned

4.2 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 400 VOLT 20(100) A

Smart Card Prepayment Electric Energy Meter
Sl. Name of Item Unit Required specifications Manufacturers
No. Particulars
1. Reference Standard - IEC
2. Country of Origin To be mentioned
3. Manufacturers Name & To be mentioned
address
4. Place of Manufacturer To be mentioned
5. Year of Manufacture & To be mentioned
Testing
6. Model of Meter - To be mentioned
7. Generation of the offered To be mentioned
Meter
8. Type - To be mentioned
9. Installation Meters are to be installed
at easy approachable
places in the consumer's
premise.
10. Connection - 3- phase, 4-wire
(unidirectional)
11. Rated voltage Volt 400
12. Maximum voltage Volt 500
13. Basic Current Amp <=10
14. Maximum Current Amp >=100
15. Frequency 50HZ
16. Number of Terminal No. 8
17. Diameter of Terminal; Bore mm 8.5mm to accommodate
25 mm2 cable
18. No. of Element No. 3
19. Voltage circuit loss at rated VA & To be mentioned
voltage W
20. Current circuit loss at rated VA 2.5
current
21. Variation of Power factor 0.5 lag to 0.8 lead
22. Variation of voltage -30% to +30%
23. Performance Curve To be submitted
24. Impulse withstand voltage KV 6
25. Starting current (minimum) mA 0.4% of basic current
26. KWh register type - LCD Display
27. Meter constant Impulse/ To be mentioned
kWhr
28. Accuracy class Class 1.0
29. Type of Battery Lithium Battery, if
necessary
30. Built in clock To be mentioned
31. Battery Reserve & Life 10(Ten)Years
32. No. of Digits for Credit min. 5+1
Storage
33. Credit Transfer System To be mentioned
34. Tariff Structure Utilitys tariff structure
35. KWhr dispensing register Solid state LCD Display
36. Front Page Indications - Credit Status


No. Particulars
- Accept/Reject
- Low credit warning
- Consumption Rate
- Tamper Indication
37. Disconnection Facility - On credit expiry
- Decommissioning state
- Exceeded Power
threshold
- When Tampered
38. Provision for emergency To be Mentioned
Friendly Credit
39. Provision for Fixed charge/ To be Mentioned
Minimum charge
40. Time interval of re- Year 10
calibration (minimum)
41. Service life (minimum) Year 10
42. Weight of meter Kg To be mentioned
43. Overall dimensions (height, mm To be mentioned
width, depth)
44. Warranty Years 3 Years
45. List of Recommended To be mentioned
Spares
46 AMR Online facility PLC module for AMR
function
47 Communication PLC
48 Any other facility if any To be mentioned

4.3 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for Data Collector

No. Particulars
3. Manufacturers Name To be mentioned
& address
Testing
6. Model of Data - To be mentioned
Collector
8. Installation device are to be installed at easy
approachable places in the consumer's
premise or under transformer.
9. Voltage range 80V ~ 460V
10. Frequency range 50HZ ~ 60HZ
11. Voltage power 5W
consumption
12. Power supply type switching power supply
13. Operation system LINUX
14. Database SQLITE SQLITE
15. Memory capacity 32MB
16. Storage capacity 256MB
17. Clock accuracy 0.5S/Day
18. Battery capacity 1200mAh lithium battery
19. Uplink communication GPRS/3G/Ethernet/WIFI/RS485/SMS
20. Downlink Zigbee/PLC/RS485
communication
21 System capacity 18pcs single phase meter
22 Data transmission Support passive query and active push
23 Communication Protocol conversion, data acquisition
gateway function between the different physical
communication medium of uplink /
downlink protocol
24 Protection index IP51
25 Working temperature -20 ~ 60
26 Limit range of working -25 ~ 70
temperature
27 Transportation and 0 ~ 40
storage temperature
28 Humidity 95%
29 Dimension To be mentioned
30 Weight To be mentioned

4.4 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for Data Concentrator

No. Particulars

3. Manufacturers Name To be mentioned
& address
Testing
6. Model of Data - To be mentioned
Concentrator
8. Installation device are to be installed at easy
approachable places in the consumer's
premise or under transformer.
9. Voltage range 230V/400V
10. Voltage Viriation -20% to 20%
11. EMC Standard EN60950
IEC61000-3-8
12. Frequency range 45HZ ~ 55HZ
13. Battery capacity 1200mAh lithium battery
14. Uplink communication GPRS/3G/Ethernet/WIFI/RS485/SMS
15. Downlink RS232/PLC/RS485
communication
16. System capacity 256M. Storage 1024 Meters 30
minutes energy load profile.
17. Clock accuracy Accuracy (internal) +30 sec/month
Accuracy maintained by Master
Station Software;
18. Communication Down-LinkDLMS/COSEM HDLC
gateway Up-LinkIEC60870-5-102, Other
Protocol
19. Protection index IP56
20. Working temperature -20 ~ 60
21 Limit range of working -25 ~ 70
temperature
22 Transportation and 0 ~ 40
storage temperature
23 Humidity 95%
24 Dimension To be mentioned
25 Weight To be mentioned

5. Drawings

DESCO Regulations

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

DESCO Regulations

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Dhaka Electric Supply Company Limited

DRAFT TENDER DOCUMENT FOR

Tender Notice No: DESCO/CS/ PSEEIIP/Package-2/2014/---

Section VI. Schedule of Supply

Procurement of Goods/Equipments Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Lot No. : Lot-1 of Package-2

Procurement of Goods/Equipments Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

1.List of Goods and Related Services.....................................................................................6-4

2.Delivery and Completion Schedule .....................................................................................6-5

3.Technical Specifications ......................................................................................................6-7

Procurement of Goods/Equipments Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

1. List of Goods and Related Services

Procurement of Goods/Equipments Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

2. Delivery and Completion Schedule

Procurement of Goods/Equipments Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Seal and Signature of the Bidder: ..

Procurement of Goods/Equipments Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Procurement of Goods/Equipments Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

3.6.4 Insulation 6-18

Procurement of Goods/Equipments Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

3.3 Climatic Condition

Altitude : 0-300 meters above the sea level

Procurement of Goods/Equipments Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

3.4. Technical Specification of 33KV, 1CX500 sq.mm, XLPE, U/G

3.4.3 Conductor Screening

The conductor shall be screened with an extruded layer of semi-conducting compound,

Lapped semi-conducting tape not to be used for conductor screens.

3.4.5 Insulation Thickness

The thickness of insulation shall be determined by taking the average of number of

Procurement of Goods/Equipments Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

3.4.6 Insulation Screening

The insulation screen shall comprise a non-metallic semi-conducting polyethylene part

3.4.7 Over sheath

Procurement of Goods/Equipments Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

3.4.9 Manufacturer Identification

3.4.10 Continuous Current Rating

3.4.11 Short Circuit Rating

Item Description of Items Unit Particulars

Procurement of Goods/Equipments Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

point may be less than nominal value provided that

Item Description of Particulars

Item Description of Particulars

Item Description of Particulars

Procurement of Goods/Equipments Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Ii Insulation For underground horizontal mounting

Technical Specification of 11KV, XLPE, 3CX300 sq.mm, U/G

3.5.1 General Technical Requirements:

3.5.3 Conductor Screening

Procurement of Goods/Equipments Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

3.5.5 Insulation Thickness

The thickness of insulation shall be determined by taking the average of number of

3.5.6 Insulation Screening

3.5.7 Over sheath

Procurement of Goods/Equipments Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

3.5.9 Manufacturer Identification

3.5.10 Continuous Current Rating

3.5.11 Short Circuit Rating

Item Description of Items Unit Particulars

Procurement of Goods/Equipments Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

i Application For 11KV, 3-core, XLPE 300 mm2 Copper Conductors

i Application For 11KV, 3-core, XLPE 300 mm2 Copper Conductors

i Application For 11KV, 3-core, XLPE 300 mm2 Copper Conductors

Procurement of Goods/Equipments Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

- Truck resistant sealant tape